american library association - upc code goes here (will ......ﬁbibliographic standards committee,...

UPC Code Goes Here (Will send separately)

(Delete Keyline)

i

Descriptive Cataloging of Ancient, Medieval, Renaissance, and Early Modern Manuscripts

Descriptive Cataloging ofAncient, Medieval, Renaissance,

and Early ModernManuscripts

Gregory A. Pass

Bibliographic Standards CommitteeRare Books and Manuscripts Section

Association of College and Research LibrariesA Division of the American Library Association

Chicago 2003


ii

The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements of American National Standard forInformation Sciences–Permanence of Paper for Printed Library Materials, ANSI Z39.48-1992. ∞

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication DataPass, Gregory A.

Descriptive cataloging of ancient, medieval, Renaissance, and earlymodern manuscripts / Gregory A. Pass.

p. cm.“Bibliographic Standards Committee, Rare Books and Manuscripts Section,Association of College and Research Libraries, American LibraryAssociation.”Includes bibliographical references and index.

ISBN 0-8389-8218-2 (alk. paper)1. Cataloging of manuscripts. I. Association of College and Research

Libraries. Rare Books and Manuscripts Section. Bibliographic StandardsCommittee. II. Title.

Z695.5 .P37 2003025.3'412--dc21 2002152837

Copyright © 2003 by the American Library Association. Portions of this publication may be photocopiedfor the noncommercial purpose of scientific or educational advancement granted by Sections 107 and 108 ofthe Copyright Revision Act of 1976.

Printed on recycled paper.

Printed in the United States of America.

07 06 05 04 03 5 4 3 2 1

iii


��

Acknowledgements v

Abbreviations ix

Introduction xi

0. General Rules 1

1. Title and Statement of Responsibility Area 15

2. Edition / Version Area 31

3. Material Specific Details Area 33

4. Place and Date of Production Area 35

5. Physical Description Area 41

6. Series Area 47

7. Note Area 49

8. Standard Number and Terms of Availability Area 75

Appendix A: Added Entry Access Points 77

Appendix B: Analysis 83

Appendix C: MARC 21 Coding Summary and Examples 87

Appendix D: MARC 21 Coded Cataloging Record Examples 111

Appendix E: Concordance between Rules in � �� , �� , and �� 119

Appendix F: Manuscript Description and Cataloging Bibliography 125

Appendix G: Glossary 143

Index 151


iv

v


� �"!$#�%'&)(+* ,.-�*0/1*#�2�3

The formulation of cataloging guidelines is not a task that can be accomplished unilaterally. Catalog-ing conventions need to reflect consensus, and in an area where the nature of the material is so diverseand the variety of approaches to its cataloging so wide consensus can be difficult to achieve. A greatdebt is owed, therefore, to the many people from the library and academic communities who have sogenerously contributed their expertise and critical judgment to the development of these guidelines.

These guidelines originated and were developed as part of a project entitled Electronic Access to MedievalManuscripts (EAMMS), funded by the Andrew W. Mellon Foundation. The goal of the Electronic Accessproject—allied with another Mellon-sponsored project, Digital Scriptorium—was to devise electroniccataloging methods that would increase the ability of researchers “to access medieval manuscript cata-log records, research information, images, text and tools” in a manner more effective than traditionalprint based resources.1 In order to achieve this end, an international body of manuscript specialistsmade up of catalogers, historians, art historians, and curators from the library and academic commu-nities was brought together to participate and advise in the project. The immediate tasks were toestablish a common set of elements that would constitute a standard set of descriptive details makingup the catalog record, and then to articulate how this information should be encoded. Two encodingstrategies were pursued: Machine Readable Cataloging (MARC) and Standard Generalized MarkupLanguage (SGML). The MARC initiative, which was based at the Vatican Film Library, Saint LouisUniversity, sought to adapt the existing MARC record structure and to develop cataloging guidelinesappropriate for manuscript codices that would be compatible with Anglo-American cataloging prac-tices.2 These guidelines received further criticism and development within the Bibliographic Stan-

1. Electronic Access to Medieval Manuscripts: A Proposal to the Andrew W. Mellon Foundation from the Hill Monastic ManuscriptLibrary, April 24, 1996, 1. Much of the earlier work in on-line cataloging of medieval manuscripts immediately leading up tothe Electronic Access project can be found in Menso Folkerts and Andreas Kühne, eds., The Use of Computers in CatalogingMedieval and Renaissance Manuscripts: Papers from the International Workshop in Munich, 10–12 August 1989, Algorismus, 4(Munich: Institut für Geschichte der Naturwissenschaften, 1990); Hope Mayo, ed., MARC Cataloguing for Medieval Manu-scripts, a special issue of Rare Books & Manuscripts Librarianship 6, no. 1 (1990); and Wesley M. Stevens, ed., BibliographicAccess to Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts: A Survey of Computerized Data Bases and Information Services (New York: HaworthPress, 1992).

2. For earlier exploration of MARC applications in cataloging medieval manuscripts, see in particular the work ofHope Mayo: “Standards for Description, Indexing and Retrieval in Computerized Catalogs of Medieval Manuscripts,” inFolkerts and Kühne, eds., Use of Computers in Cataloging Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts, 19–39; “Introduction: MARCCataloging for Medieval Manuscripts,” and “Medieval Manuscript Cataloging and the MARC Format,” in Mayo, ed.,MARC Cataloguing for Medieval Manuscripts, 7–9, 11–22; and “MARC Cataloguing for Medieval Manuscripts: An Evalua-tion,” in Stevens, ed., Bibliographic Access to Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts, 93–152. MARC has also been used forcataloging Greek papyri and other manuscript formats; see Peter van Minnen, “Introducing the Online Catalogue of theDuke Papyrus Collection,” Bulletin of the American Society of Papyrologists 31 (1994): 159–170; and Elizabeth Yakel, “PushingMARC-AMC to its Limits: The Vatican Archives Project,” American Archivist 55 (1992): 192–201. Earlier systematicformulations of AACR2R-conformant cataloging guidelines and MARC encoding procedures were devised by LaurenceS. Creider and David J. White, Proposed University of Pennsylvania Codex Manuscript Cataloging Guidelines (draft 8/31/95), andBiblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, Formato USMARC per manoscritti e materiale d’archivio (bozza, dicembre 1996).


vi

dards Committee of the Rare Books and Manuscripts Section of the Association of College andResearch Libraries, a division of the American Library Association; in additional to which they werereviewed by a special task force of the Committee on Cataloging: Description and Access of the Asso-ciation for Library Collections & Technical Services, a division of the American Library Association.They were then finally approved by the Executive Committee of the Rare Books and ManuscriptsSection of the Association of College and Research Libraries.

Among individuals involved in the development of these guidelines, none deserves greater credit forhis advocacy of the application of MARC to medieval manuscript cataloging than Laurence S. Creider.Himself the author of an earlier cataloging code for medieval manuscripts at the University of Penn-sylvania and the prime mover behind the collaboration of the EAMMS MARC initiative and theACRL/RBMS Bibliographic Standards Committee, he has been closely involved in every stage of theformulation of the present guidelines, reading and commenting upon successive drafts to their greatprofit. He combines the special skills of a medievalist and librarian and his guidance has been invalu-able. Elizabeth O’Keefe and Maria Oldal, who possess a fine knowledge of the requirements of medi-eval manuscripts in an automated cataloging environment and but for whose unflagging support andcriticism this document would be much poorer, are also to be thanked. The earlier contributions ofHope Mayo to MARC cataloging of medieval manuscripts are also to be recognized. The directors ofthe EAMMS project, Consuelo Dutschke and Eric Hollas, have earned the thanks of all involved forbringing together and coordinating the efforts of an international group of manuscript specialists.

Members of the Electronic Access to Medieval Manuscripts project were Frances Benham, MelissaConway, Laurence S. Creider, Consuelo Dutschke, Belinda Egan, Eric Hollas, Jack Marler, HopeMayo, Gregory Pass, Ambrogio Piazzoni, Dominique Poirel, Merrilee Proffitt, Lilian Randall, Rich-ard Rouse, Rachel Stockdale, and Theresa Vann.

Members of the Bibliographic Standards Committee during the development of these guidelines wereAnn Copeland, Laurence S. Creider, Sarah Schmidt Fisher, Jain Fletcher, Jane Gillis, James Larrabee,Deborah J. Leslie, Robert Maxwell, Juliet McLaren, Richard Noble, Gregory Pass, Elizabeth Robinson,Jennifer O’Brien Roper, Beth Russell, Patrick Russell, Sandra Sider, Stephen Skuce, Eileen Smith, JoeA. Springer, Bruce Tabb, and Manon Théroux.

Members of the task force of the Committee on Cataloging: Description and Access were Thomas L.Amos, Matthew Beacom, Melissa Conway, Brad Eden, Daniel W. Kinney, Gertrude Koh, Gabriele I.Kupitz, and Maria Oldal.

Other individuals deserving special mention for providing lively and profitable discussion and valu-able comment on a range of topics are Bernadette Archer, Michelle Brown, Peter Kidd, Svato Schutzner,Heather Wolfe, and Laetitia Yeandle; as well as colleagues at the Vatican Film Library and Saint LouisUniversity including Richard Amelung, Charles Croissant, Susan L’Engle, Charles Ermatinger, JackMarler, Michael Sinner, and Anna Zaidman.

vii


Support from the Andrew W. Mellon Foundation, Saint Louis University, and Pius XII MemorialLibrary has been essential to the success of this project. The Mellon Foundation generously providedfunding for three years, from 1996 to 1999. Alice B. Hayes, Executive Vice President and Provost forSaint Louis University, vigorously supported the university library and created an atmosphere in whicha project such as this could flourish. And finally, it was Frances Benham, University Librarian, whowas responsible for initiating the development of MARC cataloging for medieval manuscripts at SaintLouis University through a conference held at the Vatican Film Library in 1994 that has culminated inthe present guidelines. Her ongoing support and interest are greatly appreciated.

Gregory A. PassVatican Film LibrarySaint Louis University


viii

ix


4 5 5"6�7+8�9;:=<�9?>�@BA

AACR2R Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, 2nd ed., rev. (Ottawa: Ca-nadian Library Association; Chicago: American Library As-sociation, 1988).

Alexander and De la Mare, J.J.G. Alexander and A.C. de la Mare, The ItalianItalian Mss. Manuscripts in the Library of Major J.R. Abbey (New York:

Praeger, 1969).

AMREMM Gregory A. Pass, Descriptive Cataloging of Ancient, Medieval,Renaissance, and Early Modern Manuscripts (Chicago: Asso-ciation of College and Research Libraries, 2003).

APPM Steven L. Hensen, Archives, Personal Papers, and Manuscripts:A Cataloging Manual for Archival Repositories, Historical Societ-ies, and Manuscript Libraries, 2nd ed. (Chicago: Society ofAmerican Archivists, 1989).

BnF, Manuscrits, 1983–1992 Bibliothèque nationale de France, Manuscrits du Moyen Âgeet de la Renaissance: Enrichissements du département des manuscrits,fonds européens, 1983–92 (Paris: Bibliothèque nationale deFrance, 1994).

Codices Vaticani latini: codices 679–1134 Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, Codices Vaticani latini (Rome:Typis Polyglottis Vaticanis, 1902–).

Colophons Bénédictins de Bouveret, Colophons de manuscrits occidentauxdes origines aux xvie siècle, 6 vols. (Fribourg: Editionsuniversitaires, 1965–79).

De la Mare, Lyell Albinia de la Mare, Catalogue of the Collection of Medieval Manu-scripts Bequeathed to the Bodleian Library, Oxford, by James P.R.Lyell (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1971).

DCRB Descriptive Cataloging of Rare Books, 2nd ed. (Washington, DC:Cataloging Distribution Service, Library of Congress, 1991).

Dutschke, Huntington Library C.W. Dutschke, Guide to Medieval and Renaissance Manuscriptsin the Huntington Library, 2 vols. (San Marino, Calif.: Hun-tington Library, 1989).


x

Dutschke and Rouse, C.W. Dutschke and R.H. Rouse, Medieval and RenaissanceClaremont Libraries Manuscripts in the Claremont Libraries, Medieval and Renais-

sance Manuscripts in California Libraries, 1, University ofCalifornia Publications: Catalogs and Bibliographies, 3 (Ber-keley: University of California Press, 1986).

Ker, MMBL N.R. Ker, Medieval Manuscripts in British Libraries, 4 vols.(Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1969–92).

Lieftinck and Gumbert, G. I. Lieftinck and J. P. Gumbert, Manuscrits datés conservésManuscrits dans les Pays-Bas dans les Pays-Bas: Catalogue paléographique des manuscrits en

écriture latine portant des indications de date, 2 vols. (Amsterdam:North Holland Press, 1969–1988).

Mynors and Thomson, R.A.B. Mynors and R.M. Thomson, Catalogue of theHereford Cathedral Library Manuscripts of Hereford Cathedral Library (Cambridge: D.S.

Brewer, 1993).

Saenger, Newberry Library Paul Saenger, A Catalogue of the Pre-1500 Western ManuscriptBooks at the Newberry Library (Chicago: Chicago UniversityPress, 1989).

Samaran and Marichal, Charles Samaran and Robert Marichal, Catalogue desManuscrits en écriture latine manuscrits en écriture latine portant des indications de date, de lieu

ou de copiste (Paris: C.N.R.S., 1959–).

Shailor, Beinecke Library Barbara A. Shailor, Catalogue of Medieval and RenaissanceManuscripts in the Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript Library,Yale University, 3 vols., Medieval & Renaissance Texts andStudies, 34, 48, 100 (Binghamton, N.Y.: Medieval & Re-naissance Texts and Studies, 1984–92)

Stubbs, Select Charters William Stubbs, Select Charters and other Illustrations of En-glish Constitutional History, from the Earliest Times to the Reign ofEdward the First, 9th ed., rev. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1921).

Watson, British Library Andrew G. Watson, Catalogue of Dated and Datable Manu-scripts c.700–1600 in the Department of Manuscripts, The BritishLibrary (London: British Library, 1979).

xi


CED�F�G�HJI.KML=F'N?H�D

As an undifferentiated group of materials, manuscripts rest uneasily or not at all in the library catalog.Manuscript descriptions reside more often in finding aids that stand apart from the main library cata-log, such as handwritten inventories, card files, printed catalogs, or more recently EAD or other DTDelectronic records. Depending on the nature of the material, if an entry is given in the main catalog itwill usually be a brief record that refers to fuller information to be found elsewhere. Sometimes thisbrief reference may be all that exists. The primary reason for the general absence of manuscripts fromthe catalog is because manuscripts exist in such a variety of diverse and complex physical and biblio-graphical structures and because the depth of information required to identify and describe them is sogreat that it becomes difficult to provide satisfactory intellectual control over these materials within asingle integrated library catalog. The result is that information on manuscripts becomes widely scat-tered and simply locating this information itself often involves considerable research.

In broad terms, manuscripts are categorized as either literary or archival, and this distinction influ-ences the type of intellectual control that is applied to them: literary manuscripts, because of theirindividual importance, are generally given item-level cataloging and are subject to bibliographic con-trol, while archival manuscripts, whose importance lies in their aggregate rather than in themselves asindividual items, are generally given collection-level cataloging and are subject to archival control. Theguidelines customarily used for cataloging manuscripts according to these categories are—for item-level bibliographic control—Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, 2nd ed., revised (Chicago: American Li-brary Association, 1998), chapter 4, and—for collection-level archival control—Stephen Hensen,Archives, Personal Papers, and Manuscripts: A Cataloging Manual for Archival Repositories, Historical Societies,and Manuscript Libraries, 2nd ed. (Chicago: Society of American Archivists, 1989).

When cataloging pre-modern manuscripts, however—that is, manuscripts generally produced beforethe middle of the seventeenth century—these broad categories become less useful, as do the descrip-tive guidelines that serve them. Both these categories and cataloging guidelines are based on modernnotions of manuscripts that do not accord well with the status of pre-modern manuscripts. Bothmodern and pre-modern archival manuscripts are made up of institutional or personal legal docu-ments, records, reflections, notes, letters, etc. Modern archival manuscripts are best understood interms of their provenance and the contextual relationships of individual items between one an-other and within the archive as a whole. In the context of a MARC-based library catalog suchmaterials are most effectively served by collection-level description. Pre-modern archival manu-scripts, too, demand the same respect des fonds. However, pre-modern manuscripts are more fre-quently the objects of individual codicological or diplomatic analysis and are, thus, better servedby item-level cataloging.

For literary manuscripts, differences in the manner in which modern and pre-modern manuscripts areregarded and cataloged are more complex. Modern literary manuscripts consist largely of authors’rough drafts or finished copies of works that are intended ultimately to appear in print for publicconsumption. They are earlier incarnations of works whose value lies in the evidence they offer of the


xii

creative process, both literary and physical. In so far as they are considered to be “books,” this is only inthe abstract sense of the works they embody, not the marriage of work and printed object that isthe final published product more commonly associated with the term “book.” But before the ad-vent of printing in the West in the middle of the fifteenth century, all books were manuscripts.Indeed, scribal methods of production persisted and manuscript books continued to be pro-duced and published, though on a greatly diminished scale, up through the middle of the seven-teenth century.3 These manuscripts were not rough drafts, but finished products, and their physicaland bibliographical structures have far more in common with printed books than they do withmodern literary manuscripts.

These different characteristics of pre-modern manuscripts call for a more historically informed ap-proach to their cataloging, an approach that redresses the absence of manuscripts in the library catalogand, thus, facilitates readier access to information on them. Both APPM and AACR2R are premised ona modern notion of manuscripts that, as has been shown above, is not applicable to older materials.APPM refers the reader for “certain pre-1600 manuscripts,” and “book-like manuscripts (e.g., literarymanuscripts and codices) and other manuscript material for which a more bibliographically orienteddescription may be desirable” to AACR2R, chapter 4.4 However, AACR2R, chapter 4, reduces all manu-scripts to a single cataloging format on the general principal that they are all “unpublished materials,”lacking the usual identifying marks of authorship and publication that distinguish printed books.5

Even though some additional accommodation is made in AACR2R 4.7B23 to record certain specialfeatures of “ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts,” AACR2R provides insufficient analysisand intellectual control over pre-modern manuscript materials. Descriptive Cataloging of Ancient, Medi-eval, Renaissance, and Early modern Manuscripts (AMREMM) is intended as a supplement to AACR2R,chapter 4, in order to provide the level of analysis and intellectual control that these materials require.AMREMM offers guidance for the construction of bibliographic records within a library catalog formanuscripts dating from Antiquity, through the Middle Ages, the Renaissance, and up into the earlymodern period, in whatever form they may survive (from fragments and loose leaves to single- andmultiple-sheet letters, legal documents, and archival records to rolls and bound codices), providingitem-level, bibliographic control over both literary and archival manuscripts which—owing to theirspecial historical, artistic, or literary value—require more precise and detailed identification and accessthan is generally accorded to such materials by AACR2R or APPM.

3. On the later tradition of manuscript production, see, e.g., Peter Beal, In Praise of Scribes: Manuscripts and their Makers inSeventeenth-Century England (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1998); H.R. Woudhuysen, Sir Philip Sidney and the Circulation ofManuscripts, 1558–1640 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1996), 1–203; and Harold Love, Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-CenturyEngland (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993). The standard statement of the outlines of print culture and its departure fromscribal culture is Elizabeth L. Eisenstein, The Printing Press as an Agent of Change: Communications and Cultural Transformationsin Early-Modern Europe, 2 vols. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979), I:3–159. Among the various responses toEisenstein, see in particular Richard H. Rouse, “Backgrounds to Print: Aspects of the Manuscript Book in NorthernEurope of the Fifteenth Century,” in Mary A. and Richard H. Rouse, Authentic Witnesses: Approaches to Medieval Texts andManuscripts, Publications in Medieval Studies, 17 (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1991), 449–66, whichargues for a highly sophisticated, commercial scribal production and publication process before the age of print.

4. APPM, p. 9 and n. 2.5. See AACR2R 0.26, 1.4B1, 1.4C8, 1.4D9, 1.4F9; also APPM 0.11; and APPM, 1

st ed. (Washington, D.C., 1983), 2–3.

xiii


Over the past two decades substantial advances have been made in cataloging the major collections ofmedieval and Renaissance manuscripts held in the United States.6 Most of the major libraries in pos-session of significant collections of these materials have now issued, or are in the process of issuing,comprehensive printed catalogs of their holdings. These efforts supersede in both technical detail andcoverage the earlier surveys carried out by Seymour de Ricci, Census of Medieval and Renaissance Manu-scripts in the United States and Canada, 3 vols. (New York, 1935–40), and by C.U. Faye and W.H. Bond,Supplement to the Census of Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the United States and Canada (NewYork, 1962) which, until the relatively recent publication of these comprehensive catalogs, served largelyas the standard means of access to these collections. These recent efforts represent a methodologicalconsensus which the present cataloging rules take as their basis. Implemented in MARC 21, the resultis a combination of bibliographic control and electronic format that enables manuscript catalog recordscreated according to AMREMM to be integrated into any library’s on-line public access catalog. It ishoped that contribution of these records to the national bibliographic databases will also eventuallycreate an electronic union catalog for ancient, medieval, Renaissance, and early modern manuscriptsthat will eventually encompass not only the holdings of North American libraries but those of othercountries as well.

6. A review of the major cataloging efforts in the United States over the past twenty years is given in the preface toMirella Ferrari, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts at the University of California, Los Angeles, ed. R.H. Rouse, Medieval andRenaissance Manuscripts in California Libraries, 2, University of California Publications: Catalogs and Bibliographies, 7(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991), xi–xvii. See also Gregory A. Pass, “Electrifying Research in Medieval andRenaissance Manuscripts,” Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America 94 (2000): 507–30.

General Rules

1

0 ��

Contents0A. Scope0B. Sources of information

0B1. Chief source of information0B2. Prescribed sources of information

0C. Punctuation0D. Levels of detail in the description0E. Language and script of the description0F. Transcription and editorial practice

0F1. Methods of transcription0F2. Letter forms0F3. Capitalization, accents, and other diacritical marks0F4. Word division, syllable separation, and line fillers0F5. Variantly and erroneously spelled words0F6. Missing letters and illegible text0F7. Manuscript corrections0F8. Abbreviations

0 �� These guidelines are intended to apply to all manuscript materials ranging in date from late Antiquitythrough the Middle Ages and the Renaissance and up into the early modern period. Although the year1600 is generally considered an effective terminal date for scribal or manuscript production of books,manuscript book production and publication continue in varying degrees well into the seventeenthcentury and for some categories of materials even later. The application of these guidelines, therefore,should be governed more by the nature of the material and its method of production than by anyarbitrary chronological limit.

These guidelines are intended primarily for Latin and Western European vernacular manuscripts,though it is hoped that the directions for description and the categories of information outlined espe-cially in the notes will be found broad enough to accommodate manuscripts from other traditions aswell, such as Greek, Hebrew, Coptic, Ethiopic, Arabic, etc. They may be applied to literary manu-scripts, letters, legal documents, and archival records whether these materials are in the form of frag-ments, single leaves or sheets, rolls, or bound or unbound manuscript codices containing one or mul-

2


tiple works, regardless of whether these materials have been written, drawn, or painted on parchment,paper, papyrus, or other media.

A manuscript is understood in the literal sense here to mean any item written by hand (manu scriptus).This definition, therefore, excludes such items as typescripts, mimeographs, or other mechanicalor electronic means of substitution for handwriting customarily included in the manuscriptsformat. These guidelines may also be applied to reproductions of manuscripts in microform,photographic, or electronic formats. However, they are not for use in cataloging published fac-simile editions of manuscripts.

These guidelines conform to Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, 2nd ed., rev. (1998), which are to befollowed in default of any specific provision otherwise given here. Other cataloging rules, such asDescriptive Cataloging of Rare Books, 2nd ed. (1991) or Stephen L. Henson, Archives, Personal Papers, andManuscripts, 2nd ed. (1989), may be used as supplements in cases where the provisions given in thoseguides prove more appropriate to a particular item.

An experienced manuscripts cataloger will find a great deal more information to incorporate intoa manuscript description than can be addressed even in specialized rules such as these, or thanmay be appropriate for inclusion in a library catalog. Every manuscript is unique, and there arecertain to be instances when directions given here will not suffice. The purpose of these guidelinesis not to limit the necessarily interpretive role of the manuscripts cataloger, but simply to establish acommon framework within which a manuscript catalog description can be constructed.

0 �� "!#�$��&%('�)* +�,!

0B1. Chief source of informationThe chief source of information for any manuscript is the manuscript itself, consisting of those partsof the manuscript that are written in a script or hand contemporary with—though not necessarily iden-tical to—the script or hand of the main body of text of the manuscript. Information is to be preferredfrom a title page or colophon, if either is present. In the case of letters, legal documents, and archivalrecords, the protocol or eschatocol is to be preferred.7

In the absence of a title page or colophon, information is to be transcribed or obtained wherever it maybe found in its fullest form within the manuscript in one of the following sources generally in thisorder of preference:

• Opening or closing rubric• Running title

7. For a general introduction to the structure of medieval documents and documentary criticism, see Leonard E. Boyle,“Diplomatics,” in Medieval Studies: An Introduction, ed. James M. Powell, 2nd ed. (Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press,1992), 82–113. For detailed subject and bibliographic orientation, see Olivier Guyotjeannin, Jacques Pycke, and Benoît-Michel Tock, Diplomatique médiévale, L’Atelier du médiéviste, 2 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1993).

General Rules

3

• Contents list• Incipit• Explicit• Other evidence, e.g., script, decoration, layout, binding, etc.

If no satisfactory information is available from within the manuscript, information is to be transcribedor obtained wherever it may be found in its fullest form on an original binding written in a script orhand contemporary with—though not necessarily identical to—the script or hand of the main bodyof text of the manuscript, appearing on the cover, spine, or fore-edge, or in the case of letters, legaldocuments, and archival records, the dorse. For manuscript corrections made in a contemporary orlater script or hand, see 0F6.

If no satisfactory contemporary information is available from any of these sources, transcribe or obtainit from one of the following later alternate sources of information generally in this order of preferenceand enclose it in square brackets:

• Title page, colophon, rubrics, running titles, contents list, incipits or explicits within the manu-script written in a script or hand later than the script or hand of the main body of text of themanuscript

• Cover, spine, or fore-edge title on an original or later binding, or in the case of legal documentsor letters, the dorse, written in a script or hand later than the script or hand of the main body oftext of the manuscript

• Published or unpublished descriptions of the item emanating from or recognized as authorita-tive by the holding institution (e.g., catalogs)

• A published edition or study of the item.• Other reference sources

The absence of square brackets indicates that information is present in a manuscript and is con-temporary or original (i.e., taken from the chief source of information). The use of square brack-ets indicates that information is either present in a manuscript and contemporary or original, butsupplemented by the cataloger, as in the expansion of abbreviations (i.e., taken from the chiefsource of information); or present in a manuscript, but of a later date (i.e., taken from an alter-nate source of information); or not present in a manuscript at all, but taken from some otheralternate source of information. Regardless of whether information is taken from the chief sourceor an alternate source of information, indicate in a note the specific source and location withinthe manuscript from which information is obtained. Indicate in a note also if the information isin a script or hand later than the main body of text of the manuscript.

0B1.1 -/.103254�6&798If a published catalog description emanating from or recognized as authoritative by the holding insti-tution already exists for a manuscript, use this alternate source of information as a substitute for thechief source of information. In areas where information is normally transcribed from the chief sourceof information, instead take this information from the alternate source and enclose it in square brack-

4


ets, eliminating any marks of editorial intervention that may have been used in this alternate source ofinformation. Indicate in a note the source of this alternate information (see 7B1, 7B3, 7B27). If infor-mation from this alternate source is augmented or corrected by comparison to the chief source ofinformation, indicate this in a note.

0B2. Prescribed sources of informationThe prescribed source(s) of information for each area of the description of a manuscript is set outbelow.

Area Prescribed source of informationTitle and statement of responsibility Chief source of informationEdition / Version Chief source of informationProduction, Date, etc. Chief source of informationPhysical Description The entire itemNotes Any source

Enclose in square brackets information transcribed or obtained from sources other than the prescribedsource of information.

0 :<;�=?>�@BA�CD>FEGC*H+I�@The system employed for encoding information (MARC, EAD, typed cards, etc.) will determinethe applicability of some or all of the following rules for prescribed punctuation in the catalogrecord. See also 0F for special rules on transcription and editorial practice when transcribingsource text.

Precede each area, other than the first, by a full stop, space, dash, space (. – ), unless the area begins anew paragraph.

Precede or enclose each occurrence of an element of an area with the standard punctuation prescribedat the head of each chapter in these rules for that area.

Precede and follow each mark of prescribed punctuation by a space, except for the comma, full stop,opening and closing parentheses, and opening and closing square brackets. The comma, full stop, andclosing parenthesis and square bracket are not preceded by a space; the opening parenthesis and squarebracket are not followed by a space.

Precede the first element of each area, other than the first element of the first area or the first elementof an area beginning a new paragraph, by a full stop, space, dash, space. When that element is notpresent in a description, precede the first element that is present by a full stop, space, dash, spaceinstead of the prescribed punctuation for that element.

Follow conventions of modern punctuation when transcribing information from the source, addingmandatory ISBD marks of punctuation where applicable. Since information is transcribed in a regu-

General Rules

5

larized form (see 0F1, 0F3), do not reproduce original punctuation that would be contrary to modernconventions of punctuation or that would result in double punctuation.8

Transcription:A dynner provided in the treasourye chamber for the lord treasourer, the barons, and otherofficers of theschequire, sittinge there uppon hir maiesties affaires : the nynthe daie of De-cember in the xxxth yeare of hir highnes most prosperous reign et anno domini 1587

( J&KMLONQPSRUTWVYXOZ�RQVO[\K9]_*Va�RQb A Dynner provided in the Treasourye chamber for the Lord Treasourer theBarons and other Officers of theschequire, sittinge there vppon hir Maiesties affaires: the nynthe daie ofDecember in the xxxth yeare of hir highnes most prosperous Reign Et Anno Domini 1587)

[Dawson and Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, no. 19]

Indicate an interpolation (i.e., data taken from outside a prescribed source of information) by enclos-ing it in square brackets. Indicate a conjectural interpolation by adding a question mark following thedata within the square brackets. Indicate the omission of part of an element by the mark of omission;precede and follow the mark of omission by a space ( ... ). Indicate lacunae by enclosing the mark ofomission within square brackets ([ … ]). Omit any area, element of an area, or extraneous informationthat does not apply in describing an item (see 1A2); also omit its prescribed or enclosing punctuation.Do not indicate the omission of an area or element of an area by the mark of omission.

When adjacent elements within one area are to be enclosed in square brackets, generally enclose themin a single set of square brackets. However, when these interpolations arise from correction, expansion ofabbreviation, or supplementing faulty text (see 0F5–6, 0F8), use separate pairs of brackets for each occur-rence. When adjacent elements are in separate areas, enclose each element in a set of square brackets.

When an element ends with an abbreviation followed by a full stop or ends with a mark of omissionand the punctuation following that element either is or begins with a full stop, omit the full stop thatconstitutes or begins the prescribed punctuation.

If the source includes the punctuation marks … or [ ], replace them by — and ( ), respectively.

0 c<dfe?g�h,g�i�jlk,mon�gfpGqsrailrStupsv\gwng�jfx�y�r"zMp*r+k�tTwo levels of detail in the description are available:

• Summary• Detailed

8. For a concise introduction to punctuation in the Middle Ages, see Bernhard Bischoff, Latin Palaeography: Antiquity andthe Middle Ages, trans. Dáibhí Ó Cróinín and David Ganz (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990), 169–73. Amore detailed account is given by M.B. Parkes, Pause and Effect: An Introduction to the History of Punctuation in the West(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993).

6


Both levels of detail in the description share the same basic set of elements and differ from one anothermost significantly in the depth of treatment in the notes (see 7A3)—particularly in the contents note(see 7B5), the amount of required added entry access (see Appendix A3), and whether separate analy-sis is given to multiple works contained in an item (see Appendix B).

Summary description is intended primarily to give ready access to the work or works contained in amanuscript, while also giving some account of the essential physical features of the item. This level ofdescription differs from detailed description in the abbreviated treatment given to material in thenotes (see 7A4)—particularly in the contents note where the usual sequence of opening rubric, incipit,explicit, and closing rubric of the work or works contained in an item is generally not transcribed infavor of briefer supplied or uniform titles (see 7B5.1.1). Required added entry access is limited to placeof production and the uniform title of the manuscript (see Appendix A3.1). Separate analytic treat-ment of multiple works contained in an item may be given if desired.

Detailed description is intended to give fuller notice to both textual and paleographical, codicological,artistic, and other physical features of a manuscript. Separate analytic treatment of multiple workscontained in an item is required for detailed description when applicable (see Appendix B). A detaileddescription is distinguished primarily by the transcription of the sequence of opening rubric, incipit,explicit, and closing rubric of the work or works contained in an item (see 7B5.1.1) and by fullerinformation given in the notes describing textual and physical features (see 7A3.2), particularly theinclusion of a collation statement (see 7B7). Detailed description is flexible in terms of the overallextent of information that it may contain in the notes. While certain categories of information arerequired in a detailed description and while it may accommodate and certainly imply the possibility ofa greater wealth of information than a summary description, the actual extent and detail with whichinformation is conveyed beyond minimum requirements is determined by the cataloging agency.

The following basic set of elements must be included in all manuscript catalog records, regardless ofthe level of detail in the description, if applicable and available:

1. Title and statement of responsibilityTitle properParallel titleOther title informationFirst and subsequent statements of responsibility

2. Edition / VersionStatement of edition / versionStatement of responsibility relating to edition / version

4. Place and date of production5. Physical description

ExtentOther physical detailsDimensions

7. Notes

General Rules

7

0 {1|f}#~��B�s�F~*�s�o~��&��"�f��,�(�D�?�w��f��S�M�*�+�,�Give information in the language and system of script (e.g., Roman, Greek, Hebrew, Arabic, or other)of the source—as available typographic facilities permit—whenever text is transcribed from the sourcefor the following areas:

• Title and statement of responsibility• Edition / version

Provide interpolations enclosed in square brackets using the language and system of script of thesource when supplying missing or effaced text or when expanding abbreviations. Replace symbols (e.g.,a notary’s sign manual) that cannot be reproduced by available typographic facilities with a cataloger’sdescription in square brackets in the language of the cataloging agency. Render all other elements ofthe description in the language of the cataloging agency, except when transcribing text in a note.

0 �Y|��G~,�B�f�&��"��+��~��#��G�,�U��U~D�<��~*��*�a�&�The following section provides a general guide for transcribing and editing manuscript source text foruse in the catalog record. Diverse transcription and editorial practices exist and several of these may beemployed at the same time in a single catalog record depending upon the purpose the transcribed textserves. A general transcription and editorial practice is established here for use in the title and state-ment of responsibility area and in the edition/version area. This general practice may also be used fortranscribing and editing source text in the notes, or a more detailed transcription method may beadopted for use, depending upon the policy of the cataloging institution.

Transcription of manuscript text differs in many respects from transcription of printed text and thesedifferences have important epistemological and practical consequences for the information containedin the catalog record. A basic principle of cataloging printed texts is that information is transcribed asaccurately as possible as it is found in the chief source of information.9 Incunabula and early-printedtexts often present difficulty in this regard because of the wide variety of irregular spellings, punctua-tion, capitalization, and use of abbreviation they possess. Manuscript texts, however, exhibit thesequalities to a much higher degree, particularly in the use of abbreviation, which makes their transcrip-tion especially challenging—all the more so when it is further taken into consideration that the pro-cess involves transferring information from a handwritten source into a typographic medium. Becauseof differences between graphic (i.e., written) and typographic (i.e., printed) letter forms, transcriptionof manuscript text is not a straightforward process of transliteration, but frequently requires numer-ous editorial decisions to be made. Consequently, the role of the cataloger in transcribing manuscripttext is best conceived of as interpretation, whereas in the case of printed texts it is usually understoodto be literal transcription. The final typographic representation of manuscript text, then, is necessarilya subjective matter and the manuscript catalog record, even at the level of transcription, is understoodto be interpretive.10

9. See AACR2R 1.0F, 1.1B1, 2.14E; DCRB 0E–0J, Appendix B.10. See, e.g., the statement of editorial principles in Dawson and Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, 22–24; also

APPM, 1st ed., 3.

8


As a practical consideration, it should also be appreciated that while a work may exist in multiplecopies, each manuscript copy of its text is a unique manifestation, and that while titles given to a workmay be the same across multiple manuscript copies, they may differ in their spelling or degree ofabbreviation, or they may be entirely unalike. Effectively each title is unique, although the work is thesame. Access, then, to a work via transcribed title is not an efficient means either of retrieving a singlemanifestation or as a means of collocating multiple manifestations, unless the researcher already knowsthe particular form of the transcribed title being sought. Much more effective as a means of retrieval isaccess through uniform title for the work or through the uniform title of the manuscript itself. Themethods of transcription discussed below take into account the mediated nature of manuscript tran-scription and are intended to eliminate, or at least to diminish, the need for additional access pointsgiving multiple typographic variations of transcribed manuscript text.

0F1. Methods of transcriptionThe methods of transcription required or available for use in the catalog record differ from one an-other in regard to the extent that they regularize or preserve aspects of source text such as originalspelling, punctuation, and pre-modern letter forms. The choice of transcription method is guided bythe purpose the transcribed text serves within the catalog record.

A method of transcription is defined below (see 0F2–0F8) that is required for use when transcribingsource text in the title and statement of responsibility area. This method prescribes, among otherthings, that pre-modern letter forms be regularized to accord with modern conventions (see 0F2), thatpre-modern or irregular punctuation and word division also be regularized to accord with modernconventions (see 0F3–0F4), but that pre-modern or irregular spellings found in the source be main-tained (see 0F5).

Any method of transcription determined appropriate by the cataloging agency is permissible in thenotes, so long as that method is a clear and consistent one. It is recommended that the method definedfor use in the title and statement of responsibility area also be applied in the notes, although abbrevia-tions may be expanded silently in order to provide a more easily readable text. Alternatively, if it isdesirable to record certain characteristics of the text, such as original punctuation or additions, sup-pressions, or substitutions to the text, a cataloging agency may choose to employ a semi-diplomaticmethod of transcription (see 7A2).

0F2. Letter forms

0F2.1In general, transcribe pre-modern letter forms using their modern equivalents, but maintain lan-guage-specific characters, such as Anglo-Saxon ð and þ. Transcribe ligatures by giving their component parts as separate letters. The ligature e-caudata (ę, e-cedilla, e cédillé, hooked- or looped-e) should similarly be rendered by separating its component parts into a and e. Do not, however, separate the component letters of the ligatured digraphs æ in Anglo-Saxon, œ in French, or æ and œ in Scandinavian languages. Do not reproduce or distinguish between varying graphic forms of letters.

General Rules

9

0F2.2Follow the conventions given below for resolving transcription of the letter forms short-i, j-longa, u,and v in Latin and vernacular texts. The use of these different letter forms in the source text is condi-tioned variously by the conventions of the script, the consistency or individual practice of the scribe,the position of these letters within a word, and the language itself.

The purpose of these conventions is simply to provide a consistent and easily readable transcription,not to provide a faithful typographic representation of the graphic letter forms used in the source.Transcription that more accurately reflects graphic letter forms used in the source text may be given inthe notes.

a) short-i / j- �� 11

Latin textsFor Latin texts, transcribe both of the letter forms short-i and j-longa (usually represented in print as j)as either minuscule or majuscule i/I, depending upon context, without exception. The use in the sourceof differing graphic forms of the same letter (i) does not in itself imply vocalic or consonantal value,though the phonetic value of i does change depending upon its position. The j-longa is a characteristicfeature of cursive documentary scripts. In its minuscule form, it appears usually in initial or finalposition, though it will occasionally be found in medial position as well. It is also commonly found incombination with short-i to distinguish the two minims, as frequently in the case of roman numerals.Its appearance in formal book scripts, however, is unusual and generally discouraged. Short-i is used informal book scripts throughout the Middle Ages, though j-longa is common from the end of the thir-teenth century as an element of formalized cursive documentary scripts adapted as book scripts. Inmajuscule form, whether in cursive documentary or book scripts both short-i and j-longa resemblevarious forms of the modern upper-case J, but similarly there is no vocalic or consonantal value impliedin its use. In no instance should short-i or j-longa, whether in minuscule or majuscule form, be tran-scribed as the modern letter j/J to indicate vocalic or consonantal value.

E.g., transcribe:xij Februarij as xii Februariiejus as eiusjudex as iudexjUS as Ius or iusjtem / jtem as Item or itemjohannes as Iohannes

11. For accounts of the use of short-i and j-longa, see, e.g., E.A. Lowe, “Studia palaeographica,” in Palaeographical Papers,1907–1965, ed. Ludwig Bieler, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972), I:2–65, and The Beneventan Script: A History of theSouth Italian Minuscule (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1914), 136, 300–13; Charles Johnson and Hilary Jenkinson, English CourtHand, A.D. 1066 to 1500, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1915), I:24–26; Hilary Jenkinson, The Later Court Hands inEngland from the Fifteenth to the Seventeenth Century (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1927; rpt. New York: Ungar,1969), 36; Dawson and Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, 14.

10


Vernacular textsFor vernacular texts, transcribe the letter forms short-i and j-longa as minuscule or majuscule i/I or j/J according to their vocalic or consonantal values. However, where a text employs a short-i wherej-longa would be expected, maintain this usage.

E.g., transcribe:jci / jci as Ici or icila justice as la justicejehan as Jehanjsabeau as Isabeaujudgement / judgement as Judgement or judgementjohn as Johnjndenture / jndenture as Indenture or indenture

buttousjours as tousiours (not as tousjours)justifyed as iustifyed (not as justifyed)

b) u / v12

Latin textsFor Latin texts, transcribe the letter forms u and v according to their modern vocalic or consonantalvalues in either minuscule or majuscule form depending upon context. The use in the source of u andv as differing graphic forms of the same letter (u) does not itself imply vocalic or consonantal value,though the phonetic value of u does change depending upon position. In minuscule form, the letter uappears in initial, medial, and final positions in book scripts and cursive scripts throughout the earlyMiddle Ages. The v-shaped u, or letter v, appears from the twelfth century in cursive documentaryscripts where it occurs more frequently in initial position, with u in medial or final position, and fromthe thirteenth century in formal cursive documentary scripts adapted as book scripts. Otherwise, bookscripts in the later Middle Ages more frequently employ the letter u in initial position, though v-shaped u can be found as well. In majuscule form, the v-shaped u is used throughout the Middle Ages,though u is also found. Similarly, there is no vocalic or consonantal value implied by the letter formitself.

E.g., transcribe:seruus as servusuir as virvt as utVTRVM as utrumVIRTVS as virtus

12. For accounts of the use of u and v, see H. Maxwell Lyte, “‘U’ and ‘V’: A Note on Palaeography,” Bulletin of the Institute ofHistorical Research 2 (1924–25): 63–65; Johnson and Jenkinson, English Court Hand, I:49–51; Jenkinson, Later Court Hands,38–39; Dawson and Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting,, 15–16.

General Rules

11

Vernacular textsFor vernacular texts, transcribe the letter forms u, v, and vv as minuscule or majuscule u/U or v/V orw/W, according to their vocalic or consonantal value.

E.g., transcribe:vsage as usagesauueur as sauveurvppon as uppongouernaunce as governaunceVNIVERSALL as universallVVilliam as William

0 � 3 �M�o��M a¡��D¢f +£��G¡� +¤�¥�¦��§�§�G¥�¡&©O¦M�,¥#ª�¤�¡s«?�¬ª, U�*§&¬� U¡� +§F�s¢ ®(��¬&°*©Follow the rules for capitalization given in AACR2R Appendix A. Do not reproduce original capitali-zation from the source that would be contrary to modern conventions of capitalization. Do not addaccents or other diacritical marks not found in the source.

0 � 4 �Y±²¤�¬&ª�ªD a³s +©f a¤�¥�¦�©$�¢�¢f��µ�¢�o©�G�_�¬G��¡* +¤,¥�¦��,¥#ª¶¢f "¥#w·$ a¢f¢M�¬�©Introduce word division as necessary when transcribing text that does not clearly distinguish betweenindividual words. Transcribe syllables of a word that are separated within a line or between lines of textas a single word without indicating the discontinuity, regardless of whether the source signals theseparation (usually by a single or double stroke). Do not transcribe or otherwise attempt to representline fillers. Do not indicate line divisions within a text or breaks across a page.

E.g., transcribe:ARMAVIRUMQUECANO as Arma virumque canodeanima as de animaaeta | tis as aetatisincar//nationem as incarnationem

0 � 5 �_¸?�,¬� U��¥�¡*¢¹´��,¥#ª�¨�¬&¬�¤�¥#¨�¤�ºD©�¢9´�©��¨�¢�¢�¨Gª»¼¤,¬�ªD©Transcribe variantly and erroneously spelled words as they appear in the source. Do not correct ornormalize spellings that follow pre-modern orthographic conventions or that are merely erratically orpoorly spelled. Maintain variant spelling conventions favored by the source (e.g., c/t, y/i, e/ae) whentranscribing text and expanding abbreviations. If a misspelling consists of simply the omission of aletter, supply the missing letter in square brackets. If a word is spelled, declined, or conjugated in amanner clearly owing to error, ignorance, or regional practice—that is, it does not simply use a non-classical spelling—signal this irregularity by the use of “[sic].”

admonicio / admonitioparadysus / paradisuscelum / caelummiser[i]cordia

12


Decretorum descordantium [sic] concordia (for discordantium)dissipuli [sic] (for discipuli)vinum est mera [sic] (for merum)

0 ½ 6 ¾f¿ÁÀaÂfÂ�À"ÃBÄ�ÅMÆ�Ç&ÇsÆ�È�Â(É�Ã#Ê�ÀaÅfÅ�Æ�Ä*À"Ë�ÅMÆ¯ÇDÆ�Ì*ÇIf the space for an enlarged or otherwise decorated or illuminated initial letter has been left blank andno guide letter is present, supply the missing letter enclosed in square brackets. If a guide letter ispresent, supply the missing letter, but do not enclose it in square brackets. If other letters or text areillegible or missing from the manuscript owing to damage or trimming, supply the missing letters ortext in square brackets. If the original reading cannot be recovered, or if at least a conjectural readingcannot be supplied, substitute a hyphen for each of the missing characters and enclose it in squarebrackets. If the number of missing characters cannot be determined, substitute the mark of omission.Provide a note indicating the nature of such omissions or damage.

[I]n principiostip[-----]s[…]ter

0 ½ 7 ¾9¿ÁÉ�Ã#ÍDÂfÎ&È�À"ÏMÇÐÎ�ÑÈ�È&Æ�ÎFÇ�ÀaÑ,Ã�ÂIf a text possesses corrections arising from additions, suppressions, or substitutions (e.g., marginal orinterlinear insertion, cancellation by erasure, strikethrough, expunctuation, transformation, or super-imposition) in a script or hand contemporary with—though not necessarily identical to—the scriptor hand of the main body of text of the manuscript, incorporate these corrections into the transcrip-tion of the text without signal. If the correcting script or hand is later than the script or hand of themain body of text of the manuscript, transcribe the original text as it appears in the source withoutincorporating any of the corrections. If desired, transcribe the text in a note using a semi-diplomatictranscription to show the state of correction. If there is doubt whether the correcting script or hand iscontemporary, transcribe the uncorrected text.

0 ½ 8 ¾_ÒË�ËFÈ&Æ�ÓDÀaÉ�Ç*À+Ñ�ÃÂ 13

Expand all suspensions, contractions, nomina sacra, Tironian notes, symbols, and other abbreviationsto their full form, enclosing supplied letters or words in square brackets. When a choice of spelling is

13. The standard manual for medieval abbreviations is Adriano Cappelli, Lexicon abbreviaturarum: Dizionario di abbreviaturelatine ed italiane, 6th ed. (Milan: Ulrico Hoepli, 1967). See also Auguste Pelzer, Abbréviations latines médiévales: Supplément auDizionario di abbreviature latine ed italiane de Adriano Cappelli, 2nd ed. (Louvain: Publications universitaires; Paris: Béatrice-Nauwelaerts, 1966), and the translation of Cappelli’s introductory essay, “Brachigrafia medioevale,” as The Elements of Abbre-viation in Medieval Latin Paleography, trans. David Heimann and Richard Kay, Univerisity of Kansas Publications, LibrarySeries, 47 (Lawrence, Kans.: University of Kansas Libraries, 1982); Charles Trice Martin, The Record Interpreter, 2nd ed.(London: Stevens, 1910; rpt. Hildesheim: G. Olms, 1969); W. M. Lindsay, Notae Latinae: An Account of Abbreviations in LatinMSS. of the Early Minuscule Period (c. 700–850) (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1915; rpt. Hildesheim: G. Olms,1963); Ludwig Traube, Nomina sacra: Versuch einer Geschichte der christlichen Kurzung (Munich: C.H. Beck, 1907). A conciseand systematic introduction is given by Bischoff, Latin Palaeography, 150–68, and a non-specialist introduction by L.C.Hector, The Handwriting of English Documents, 2nd ed. (London: Edward Arnold, 1966), 29–39.

General Rules

13

available in expanding abbreviations, render the expansion in accordance with the spelling conventionsused in the text if it is possible to determine them with any consistency. In other words, do not substi-tute a classical spelling where the manuscript would use a medieval spelling (e.g., do not substitute“prae” where the source favors “pre”). Do not reproduce Tironian notae, the ampersand, or other sym-bols, but instead supply in square brackets the letters or words for which they stand in the language ofthe text. Transcribe each expansion or supplied word in its own set of square brackets (e.g., “...p[re]d[ict]or[um] [et] ...”).

E.g., transcribe:& as [et] or [and] or …7 as [et] or [and] or …÷ as [est]

_dominu as dominu[m]

_gra as gr[ati]av

3as v[idelicet]

Where the expansion of an abbreviation is conjectural, use a question mark following the suppliedletters or words within the square brackets. Where it is unclear how an abbreviation should be ex-panded, as in certain place names and personal names, use an apostrophe to indicate the presence of amark of abbreviation, regardless of the actual form of the mark of abbreviation in the source text.

E.g., transcribe:

_ro as r[ati]o[nem?]Berk’ as Berk’Ricardus de Hoton’ as Ricardus de Hoton’

Retain abbreviations for ordinal numbers, units of weight, money, and measurement, and customarilyabbreviated titles of address.

E.g., transcribe:xx. as xx.xvth as xvthivto as ivtoCCmo as CCmo5s. as 5s.Mr as Mr.Kt as Kt.

14


15

Title and Statement of Responsibility Area

��

Contents1A. Preliminary Rule

1A1. Punctuation1A2. Sources of information

1B. Title proper1B1. Literary and other manuscripts1B2. Letters, legal documents, and archival records

1B2.1. Content date1B2.2. Letters1B2.3. Legal documents and archival records

1C. General material designation1D. Parallel title1E. Other title information1F. Statements of responsibility

1 ��! "�$#%�'&(�)�1A1. PunctuationFor instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 0C.Precede the title of a supplement or section by a full stop.Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.For the punctuation of this area when there is no collective title, see 1B1.4.On reproducing original punctuation from the source, see 0C, 0F3.


16

1A2. Sources of information

1A2.1Take information recorded in this area from the chief source of information. Record in a note thelocation within the item where this information was obtained. Enclose in square brackets all informa-tion taken from alternate sources of information.

1A2.2Omit from a title or statement of responsibility elements that do not constitute title information or astatement of responsibility. For instance, omit such words as “incipit” or “explicit” that may follow orprecede a title or statement of responsibility. Omit other extraneous elements such as pious invoca-tions, epigrams, mottoes, dedications, statements of patronage, etc. Do not use the mark of omissionto indicate the exclusion of extraneous elements or other information preceding or following a title orstatement of responsibility.

P[ublii] Vergilii Mar[onis] Bucolicorum liber

( *,+�-/.10324+65�798'5:+/.�;=<?>@7A+/8)B(+DC(2�8'798$E�.6-�FG.37H03I P. VIRGILII MAR. BVCOLICORVM LIBERINCIPIT.)

[Alexander and De la Mare, Italian Mss., 39]

Speculum iudiciale / a Magistro Guillelmo Duranti compositum

( *J+�-/.�0�2K+L5M7N8O5P+6.�;Q</>R7H+68�B�+�CJ2�8'7S8GET.L-�F6.�7@0�I In nomine domini et gloriose virginis matris eius incipitspeculum iudiciale a magistro Guillelmo duranti compositum.)

[Dutschke, Huntington Library, II:604]

Commentariorum C[aii] Iulii Caesaris de bello Gallico liber / Iulius Celsus Consta[n]tinusquintus co[n]sul emendavit

( *J+�-/.�0�2K+L5U7N8O5P+/.V;Q<G>R7H+L8$B�+�CW2�8X7S8?EY.Z-�F6.�7@0�I COMMENTARIORVM C. IVLII CAESARIS DEBELLO GALLICO LIBER PRIMVS INCIPIT FOELICITER. IVLIVS CELSVSCONSTA[N]TINVS QVINTVS CO[N]SVL EMENDAVIT.)

[Alexander and De la Mare, Italian Mss., 131]

Omit from a title the numeration of particular chapters, books, or other significant parts of a workwhen that work is present in its entirety or in more units than the title would accurately describe. If awork is not present in its entirety, indicate in a note the number of chapters, books, or other significantparts of the work that are present.

Macrobii Theodosii viri illustrissimi Saturnalium liber

17


( [�\)]/3_�3a!\6b,cNdObP\/VeQfGgRcH\6d�hO\3i,3dXcSdGjkZ])l/�c@_�m Macrobii theodosii uiri illustrissimi Saturnalium liberprimus incipit. nWop\/aqcSd?j"^L])l/^�cR_�m Macrobii theodosii viri illustrissimi Co[n]uiuior[um] tertii diei Liber etultimus explicit . . .)

[Alexander and De la Mare, Italian Mss., 41–43]

1A2.3If more than one title and statement of responsibility is present for the same work, transcribe the onethat is clearly given prominence over any other by its presence on a title page or in a colophon, or onethat is distinguished by its type or grade of script, color of ink, or placement on the page, even thoughit may be shorter than a fuller form of a title and statement of responsibility found elsewhere. In theabsence of a title and statement of responsibility distinguished by its presence on a title page or in acolophon, or by its prominence, transcribe the one that may be found in its fullest form. Give varianttitles in a note for variations of title and statement of responsibility (see 7B4), if these are not alreadyrecorded as part of a contents note.

Modus quomodo parliamentum regis Anglie et Anglorum suorum tenebatur

( [M\)]6^V_�`3aX\Zb$cSd�bP\Z^qe4fGgrc@\6d?hs\�i,`�dOctdGj"^s]$l/^VcR_Vm Hic discribitur modus quomodo parliamentum regis Anglieet anglorum suorum tenebatur. nuoA\6aVcSd?jvs])l/�c@_�m Explicit modus parliamenti.)

[Saenger, Newberry Library, 56]

Vita et passio S[ancte] Thome Cantuariensis Archiepiscopi et Martyris

( [�\?]/�_��aO\Lb?ctd�bw\Zqe4f/grcR\Ld$h1\�i,�d�ctdGj!s]$l6VcR_Ux i�q�b@f6_VVyqm Incipit prefatio in vitam S. Thome Cantuariensisarchiepiscopi et martyris. z{iJ�dOcSd$j{L])l/�c@_WxPgA�|�gry�m In nomine p. et f. et s.s. Willelmus secundus. IncipitVita S. Thome Cantuariensis archiepiscopi et martyris. nWoH\GaqcSd/j"Z])l6Vc@_�m Explicit vita et passio S. ThomeCantuariensis archiepiscopi et martyris.)

[De la Mare, Lyell, 9–10]

Liber ethicorum / compilatus a Fratre Alberto Theutonico de Ordine Fratrum Predicatorum

( [�\)]/3_�3aM\Lb�c9d�b:\6�eQfGgRc@\6d�h/\�iW�dOcSdGj{L]�l6Vc@_ : Incipit ethica fratris Alberti cuius primus tractatus est decommunibus … n(oA\GaqcSdGj}L])l/Vc@_ : Explicit liber ethicorum compilatus a fratre alberto theutonico deordine fratrum predicatorum.)

[Shailor, Beinecke Library, III:311]

In selecting between titles, give preference—all other choices being equal—to one that includes astatement of responsibility.

Politicorum Aristotilis liber


18

( ~J��/��D�,�Z�'�S�O�P�/�V�Q�G�R�H�6��G�3�W��X�S�G��L�)�/��@� : Politicorum Aristotilis liber primus incipit … �(�p�/�q�S�?��Z��/��@� : Explicit liber politicorum deo gracias.)[Saenger, Newberry Library, 42]

If the preceding criteria fail to produce a satisfactory title and statement of responsibility, the choice oftitle and statement of responsibility is at the discretion of the cataloger.

Sancti Ambrosii Episcopi De officiis ministrorum

( ~��)�G�D�3�D�Y�L�{�N�X�:�/��Q�?�R�A�6�)�J�3�W�D�X�N�$��L�)�G��H� : Incipit liber Ius sancti Ambrosii episcopi de officiisministrorum. �W�p�/�V�S�G��Z��6�V�@� : Explicit liber tercius beati Ambrosii de officiis ministrorum.)


Pour se que pluisours gens desirent asavoir la nature des fauconsorLa nature des faucons orDes fauconsorDes oysiausor[Traité de la fauconnerie]

( ~J��/��D�U�Z�)�N�O�P�6��Q�/�R�H�6�� S�M�q� ��H� : Pour se que pluisours gens desirent asavoir la nature des faucons …�J� �U�R�@�V�p� : Et ce que nous avons dit des oysiaus de proie suffice. ~/��S��{�R�p�S�A� �@�O�$�r�=�3��M�@� � : Traité de lafauconnerie.)

�� Possible titles listed in descending order of preference. The full incipit of the work is preferable as the

fullest form of the title proper, though the more concise version “La nature des faucons” derived fromthe incipit is also acceptable. “Des faucons” and “Des oysiaus” are too brief, and “Traité de lafauconnerie,” though it is a more apt description of the work, is of a later date than the main bodyof text. In any case, all versions of the title not selected as the title proper should be recorded in anote and access provided.

[BnF, Manuscrits, 1983–1992, 93]

1 �K k¡Y¢:£J¤)¥§¦O¨X©"¦O¥'¨1B1. Literary and other manuscripts

1B1.1Transcribe the title proper exactly to wording, order, and spelling, but not necessarily as to punctua-tion and capitalization. The title proper includes any alternative title, parallel title, other title informa-tion, statements of responsibility, or statements of edition/version that either precede or follow the

19


chief title—if these elements constitute grammatically integral parts of the title proper. Follow themethod of transcription as given in 0F. Do not transpose or rearrange information in any way. Expandall abbreviations, punctuate according to modern convention, and capitalize according to the rulesgiven in AACR2R, Appendix A.

Le rommant de la rose

Hystoria Brittonum

Actas de las cortes de Madrid año 1393

Regula Sancti Benedicti

Petri Lombardi Sententiarum IV

Sermo Beati Augustini Episcopi de nativitate Domini

Commentarii et expositione Georgii Trapezuntii in aphorismis libri fructus Ptolomei

Transcribe an alternative title as part of the title proper. Precede and follow the word or phrase intro-ducing the alternative title by a comma and capitalize the first word of the alternative title.

Periphyseon, id est, De divisione naturae

Liber physicorum, sive, Auditus physici

Consulta Beati Basilii, que dicuntur, Regula eiusdem

1B1.2If the only title present on an item is one that has been added subsequent to its creation (that is, absentfrom the chief source of information, being in a script later than that of the main body of text), recordthis title in square brackets and provide a note indicating its nature and source. See 0B1.

[Questiones disputate Sancti Thome]

1B1.3If the title of an item is incorrect or obsolete, and is not simply a variant form of the title, give thecorrect or current title as the title proper enclosed in square brackets. Transcribe in a note the incorrector obsolete title information.

1B1.4If an item containing two or more works lacks a collective title, treat the title of the predominant ormost significant work (as determined by the cataloger) as the title proper for the whole item. Follow


20

this title with the mark of omission and “etc.” enclosed in square brackets (… [etc.]) and provide acomplete list of the works contained in the item in a contents note, including the work selected as the titleproper. Omit any statement of responsibility for the predominant or most significant work that is not agrammatically integral part of the title proper. Give appropriate added entry access (see Appendix A2).

Carta foreste … [etc.]

( ªJ«�¬/�®�¯D°{«L±u²N³O±:«6�´QµG¶R²@«L³ : 1. fol. 1r–77v: [Title page] [Rubr.] Here begynnethe the Booke namedCarta Foreste. 1562. [rubr.] — 2. fol. 78r–85v: Collection of extracts, in Latin, all concerning laws offorest.)

[Shailor, Beinecke Library, I:127]

Epistole Ivonis Carnotensis Episcopi … [etc.]

( ªJ«�¬/�®�¯D°W«Z±�²N³O±:«L�´QµG¶R²H«6³ : 1. fol. 1r–122v: Incipiunt epistole Iuonis Carnotensis episcopi …—2. fol.123r–146v: Epistolae ad Amicum / Anon.—3. fol. 147r–154v: Epistolae / Gilbert Foliot— 4. fol.155r–160v: Vita Sanctae Mariae Egyptiacae / Hildebert of Le Mans …)

[Mynors and Thomson, Hereford Cathedral Library, 72]

1B1.5If an item containing two or more works lacks a collective title and no single work predominates or theworks are of comparable significance , describe the item as a unit. Give the titles of the predominant ormost significant works (as determined by the cataloger), treating multiple sources of information asthough they were a single source. Separate titles of works by the same author with a space-semicolon-space, and precede titles by different authors, except for the first, with a full stop followed by a singlespace. Provide a complete list of the works contained in the item in a contents note, including theworks selected to describe the item as a unit. Give appropriate added entry access (see Appendix A2).If providing more than a summary description, make in addition a separate description for each sig-nificant work.

Scriptum Ethicorum Aristotelis / secundum Thomam de Aquino. Super libroRhetoricorum Aristotelis / editum a Fratre Egidio de Roma

( ªJ«�¬/�®�D°U«Z±)²N³O±P«6�Qµ/¶R²H«6³X· 1. fol. 1r–101v, «�J�³'²S³G¹KL¬)º/�²@®�· Scriptum ethicorum aristotelis … secun-dum Thomam de aquino …— 2. fol. 103r–224r, «�J3³O²S³G¹"Z¬�º6�²@®�· Incipit opus super libro rhetoricorumaristotelis. Editum a fratre Egidio de roma …; ®:»A«G°:²S³$¹¼Z¬�ºL�²@®�· Et sic finit sententia super librumrethoricorum aristotelis …)

[Codices Vaticani latini: codices 679–1134, II, i:87]

Aurelii Augustini Doctoris De sermone Domini in monte ; Sancti Augustini Inepistolam Sancti Iohannis Apostoli. Sancti Ambrosii Episcopi De officiis ministrorum

21


( ½�¾)¿/À3Á�Â3ÃK¾6ÄJÅNÆ�Ä:¾6À�ÇQÈGÉRÅ@¾6ÆXÊ 1. fol. 1r–44v, ¾�ËWÂ3ÆOÅSÆ?Ì4Às¿�Í6À�Å@Á�Ê Aurelii Augustini doctoris de sermonedomini in monte liber incipit …—2. fol. 45r–84v, ¾�ËWÂ�Æ'ÅSÆGÌ}Às¿�Í6À�Å@Á�Ê Incipit tractatus primus sanctiAugustini in epistolam sancti Iohannis apostoli ab eo …; ÁPÎH¾LÃ:ÅtÆGÌ!Às¿)ÍLÀVÅRÁ�Ê Explicit expositio sancti Augustinisuper epistolam sancti Iohannis.— 3. fol. 85r–146r, ¾3ËJÂ�ÆOÅSÆ$ÌvÀZ¿)Í/À�Å@Á�Ê Incipit liber Ius sancti Ambrosiiepiscopi de officiis ministrorum …; Á:ÎA¾GÃqÅNÆ/Ì�ÀL¿�Í/À�Å@Á�Ê Explicit liber tercius beati Ambrosii de officiisministrorum.)


If certain works in an item described as a unit do not predominate or are not deemed significantenough to include in the title used to describe the item as a unit, follow this title with the mark ofomission and “etc.” enclosed in square brackets (… [etc.]).

Hystoria evangelium. Hystoria actuum apostolorum … [etc.]

( ½�¾)¿/À3Á�Â3Ã�¾LÄ�ÅNÆOÄ:¾LÀ�ÇQÈGÉRÅH¾ZÆXÊ 1. fol. ir: Old Testament genealogies—2. fol. 1r–246r, ÅSÆUÁVÅ ËUÅpÉRÊ Imperatoriemaiestatis est in palatio habere mansiones …; Á:ÎA¾6ÃVÅSÆ?ÌTÀZ¿)Í6À�Å@Á�Ê Explicit Hystoria evangelium.—3. fol.246r–278v, ¾�ËJÂ3ÆOÅSÆ?Ì}ÀZ¿�Í/À�Å@Á�Ê Incipiunt capitula Hystorie actuum apostolorum …; ÁPÎA¾GÃqÅSÆ?ÌQÀZ¿)Í/À�Å@Á�ÊExplicit Hystoria actum apostolorum.)

[Dutschke, Huntington Library, II:704–705]

Do not use more than three individually titled works to describe an item as a unit.

1B1.6If an item lacks a title, supply one as instructed below. Give the source of the supplied title in the note area.

If a work already possesses a title, but no title can be established from the manuscript copy in hand,supply a title in the original language by which the work (other than one written in classical Greek orby a post-classical or Byzantine writer in Greek, or one not otherwise written in a Greek or romanscript, as defined in AACR2R 25.4B–25.4C) is identified in the following order of preference:

• modern reference sources• modern printed editions• early printed editions• other manuscript copies of the work

[De consolatione philosophiae]

[Historia regum Britanniae]

If a work possesses no title peculiar to itself, supply a brief descriptive title in the language of thecataloging agency—not the language of the work—that reflects the genre and nature of the material.


22

[Bestiary]

[Herbal]

If the supplied title and the uniform title for the work are the same—as may happen especially in thecase of sacred scripture or liturgical works—distinguish the supplied title proper from the uniformtitle by abridgement or adaptation by emphasizing some particular aspect of the genre or nature of thematerial.

[Book of hours : use of Rouen]

ÏÑÐZÒSÓ�Ô3ÓUÕRÖ:×TØ6ÓUÙ�Ô3Ö1Ú Catholic ChurchÛ ÓOÒNÜPÝ6ÖVÞßÕRÒpÕSàAÔ3Ú

Book of hours (Ms. National Art Library. MSL/1902/1654)á ÙOÙ�ÔsÙâÔ3ÓUÕrÖ:×�Ø6Ó�Ù�Ô�Ö1Ú National Art Library (Great Britain). Manuscript. MSL/1902/1654

[Psalter]

ÏÑÐZÒSÓ�Ô3ÓUÕRÖ:×TØ6ÓUÙ�Ô3Ö1Ú Catholic ChurchÛ ÓOÒNÜPÝ6ÖVÞßÕRÒpÕSàAÔ3Ú

Psalter (Ms. Library of Congress. BX2033.A2 1200z)á ÙOÙOÔ1ÙYÔ3ÓUÕRÖ:×TØ6ÓMÙ�Ô�Ö1Ú Library of Congress. Manuscript. BX2033.A2 1200z

[Psalter]

ÏÑÐZÒSÓ�Ô3ÓUÕRÖ:×TØ6ÓUÙ�Ô3Ö1Ú Catholic ChurchÛ ÓOÒNÜPÝ6ÖVÞãÕRÒpÕNàAÔ3Ú

Psalter (Ms. Utrecht)á ÙOÙOÔ1ÙvÔDÓUÕRÖ:×YØ/Ó�Ù�Ô3Ö(Ø6Ó'ÒNÜPÝ6ÖVÞãÕRÒpÕSàHÔ3ÚUtrecht psalter

[Acts of the Apostles]

ÏÑÐZÒSÓ�Ô3ÓUÕRÖ:×TØ6ÓUÙ�Ô3Ö(Ø/ÓOÒ9ÜPÝLÖ�ÞäÕRÒpÕSàAÔ: Bible. N.T. Acts of the Apostles. Coptic. Pierpont Mor-

gan Library. Manuscript. G.67á ÙOÙOÔ1ÙYÔDÓUÕRÖ:×�Ø6Ó�ÙOÔ�Ö: Pierpont Morgan Library. Manuscript. G.67

[Apocalypse]

ÏÑÐZÒNÓQÔ�ÓUÕRÖ:×�Ø/ÓUÙ�ÔDÖuØ6Ó'Ò9ÜPÝLÖVÞåÕRÒAÕ9àHÔ3Ú Bible. N.T. Revelation. Latin. British Library. Manu-

script. Royal 19 B. xvá ÙOÙOÔ1ÙYÔ3ÓUÕRÖ:×�Ø6ÓUÙ�Ô3Ö1Ú British Library. Manuscript. Royal 19 B. xv

For standard works accompanied by commentaries or glosses, such as the Bible or the Corpus iuris civilisor the Corpus iuris canonici, that lack a title—especially when these commentaries or glosses are anony-mous or excerpted from other sources—determine which is the primary work, either the text or thecommentary or gloss on the text. If the text is primary, supply the title by which the text is commonly

23


known or an abridgement or adaptation of the uniform title of the text emphasizing the presence ofaccompanying commentary or gloss. If the commentary or gloss is primary (as in the case of a continu-ous commentary), give the title by which the commentary or gloss is commonly known or the uniformtitle of the commentary or gloss .

Text primary

[Psalms : with Glossa ordinaria]

æÑç1èNé=ê3é�ë@ì:í�î6éUïOê�ìKî6é'èNðPñ6ìVò�ëRèpëNóHê3ô Bible. O.T. Psalms. Latin. Houghton Library. Manu-

script. MS Typ 260õ ïOïOê1ïvêDéUëRì:íYî/é�ï�ê3ì(î6é'èNðPñ6ìVòãëRèpëSóHê3ô Glossa ordinariaõ ïOïOê1ïYê3éUëRì:íTî6é�ïXê�ì1ô

Houghton Library. Manuscript. MS Typ 260

Commentary primary

[Commentarius in Psalmos]

æÑçsèSé�êDéUëRìqíTî/é�ï�ê�ì1ô Gilbert de La Porré, Bishop, ca. 1075-1154ö éOèSðPñ/ìVòãëRèpëNóHê3ô

Commentarius in Psalmosõ ïOïXê1ïvê3éUëRì:ívî/éUï�ê3ìWî6é�èSðPñ/ìVòäë@èHë9ó@ê3ô Bible. O.T. Psalms. Latin. Houghton Library. Manu-

script. fMS Typ 29õ ïOïXê1ïYê3éUëRì:íTî6éUïOê�ì1ô Houghton Library. Manuscript. fMS Typ 29

If none of the provisions for assigning a collective title from disparate individual titles proper within acollection proves satisfactory, supply a uniform or devised title appropriate to the item. If a collectionor compilation contains works or items related by theme or genre, supply a title that reflects this themeor genre. For a collection or compilation of literary passages, use the term florilegium. For a collection orcompilation of passages or items intended for reference, use the term commonplace book. For a collectionor compilation of materials that are so disparate in nature that they defy classification, use the termmiscellany.14 If the items are dated or datable, give the range of dates represented by the content of thecollection or compilation as part of the supplied title.

[Treatises on rhetoric]

[Arthurian romances]

[Florilegium]

14. For a discussion of the taxonomy of such works as florilegia, commonplace books, anthologies, or miscellanies, and ofthe issues involved in describing them, see Stephen G. Nichols and Siegfried Wenzel, eds., The Whole Book: CulturalPerspectives on the Medieval Miscellany, (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1996), particularly essays by SiegfriedWenzel, “Sermon Collections and their Taxonomy,” 7–21, and Barbara A. Shailor, “A Cataloger’s View,” 153–67.


24

[Medical formulary]

[Sermons]

[Commonplace book of legal precedents]

[Year Books, 5–7 Edward III]

[Statuta Nova, 1 Edward III–23 Henry VI]

1 ÷ 2. ø�ù$úJúWùXûUüGýOþ)ùOÿ��Wþ��ù�Kú�ü/ý�� "û��(þ4û�ù��"û��(ü 15

1B2.1. Content dateRecord the date of the content of an item—as opposed to its date of production—as part of thesupplied title for letters, legal documents, and archival records. Do not record this information in theplace and date of production area. If an item is an original or autograph, assume the content date to bethe same as its date of production. Similarly, assume the place of production to be the same. If an itemis known to be a later copy and the content date and date of production therefore differ, provide a noteindicating the fact of its later date or different place of production.16

Give exact dates using Arabic numerals expressed in the form: year, month, day. A wide range of datingsystems were employed throughout Western Europe, North Africa, and the Middle East from Antiq-uity up to the early modern period: the Dionysian or Christian era (anno domini), the Jewish era, theIslamic era of the Hegira, the Roman civil calendar, the Christian ecclesiastical calendar, regnal years,legal chronology, and many others. Convert dates given in these or other chronological systems toArabic numbers and render them according to the Gregorian calendar. Convert all Old Style dates ofthe Julian calendar (including those prior to 1582) to New Style dates of the Gregorian calendar usingJanuary 1 as the beginning of the year.17 Make any necessary corrections of error. Record original state-ments of date of production in a note.

15. The treatment of the supplied title and the order of its elements set out in this section follows AACR2R 4.1B2 where allinformation in the supplied title is regarded as the title proper. This treatment differs from that given for similar items in APPM1.1B2, 1.1B4–B5, and 1.1E1 where all information following the “form of material” is regarded as other title information.16. For legal documents that confirm and rehearse the text of an earlier document in full or in part (known as a confirma-

tion, or vidimus, or inspeximus), catalog the later document.17. For an introduction to medieval chronology, see R. Dean Ware, “Medieval Chronology,” in James M. Powell, ed.,

Medieval Studies: An Introduction, 252–77. For further information on systems of chronology and aids for converting dates,see Reginald Lane Poole, Medieval Reckonings of Time, Helps for Students of History, 3 (London: Society for PromotingChristian Knowledge, 1935); C. R. Cheney, A Handbook of Dates for Students of British History, rev. ed., Royal HistoricalSociety Guides and Handbooks, 4 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000); Guyotjeannin, Pycke, and Tock,Diplomatique médiévale, 50–57; E. B. Fryde and F. M. Powicke, Handbook of British Chronology, 3rd ed., Royal HistoricalSociety Guides and Handbooks, 2 (London: Royal Historical Society, 1986); A. Giry, Manuel de diplomatique (Paris: Hachette,1893; rpt. Hildesheim: G. Olms, 1972); Adriano Cappelli, Cronologia, cronografia e calendario perpetuo, 2nd ed. (Milan: Hoepli,1930); AACR2 22.17A.

25


1264 Jan. 23(��!

: … in crastino beati Vincentii Martyris, A.D. MoCCoLXoIIIo, mense Januario. "$#&%'# yearbeginning March 1.)

[Stubbs, Select Charters, 397]

1266 Oct. 31(��!

: … pridie kalendas Novembris anno gratiae MoCCoLXoVIo, regni vero domini Henrici regisAngliae anno quinquagesimo primo.)


1275 May 19(��!

: … die Dominica in festo Sancti Dunstanii episcopi anno regni eiusdem regis tertio.)[Stubbs, Select Charters, 444]

1259 Oct. 13(��!

: Anno ab Incarnatione Domini MoCCoLoIXo regni autem Henrici regis, filii regis Johannis,xliiio … in quindena Sancti Michaelis.)


1402 Oct. 4(��!

: Millesimo Quadricentessimo secundo. Indiccione decima die iiijto mensis octubris.)[Watson, British Library, I:29, #31]

1B2.2. LettersFor single letters, supply a title consisting, in the following order, of the form designation Letter, thedate of writing (expressed as year, month, day), the place of writing, the name of the addressee, and theplace to which the letter is addressed, insofar as this information can be ascertained. Enclose the wholetitle in square brackets, regardless of whether certain elements of the title may or may not be present inthe item.

[Letter, 1533 Sept. 26, Waltham Abbey to Arthur Plantagenet, Lord Lisle, Calais]

[Letter, 1454 (?) Feb. 1, Norwich to John Paston I]

For bound or unbound collections of letters lacking a collective title, supply a title consisting of theform designation Letters and as many of the title elements given above for a single letter as is consistentwith the collection as a whole, but giving at least the inclusive dates for the collection. When appropri-ate, also include as part of the supplied title bulk dates for the material. Enclose bulk dates in parenthe-ses with the designation bulk and following the inclusive dates.

[Letters, 1452–1510]

[Letters, 1555–1635 (bulk 1590–1610)]


26

1B2.3. Legal documents and archival recordsFor single legal documents and archival records, such as wills, deeds, charters, mortgages, leases, vari-ous manor rolls, warrants, commissions, writs, oaths, etc., supply a title consisting, in the followingorder, of a word or brief phrase characterizing the type of document, the date of execution (expressedas year, month, day), the name of the principal party or parties involved or to whom the document isdirected, and the occasion for the document expressed concisely, insofar as this information can beascertained. Enclose the whole title in square brackets, regardless of whether certain elements of thetitle may or may not be present in the item.

[Grant, 1325 June 26, of land in Hooke (Dorset) to John de Barkingdon]

[Lease, 1586 June 10, of the manor of White Waltham (Berks.) to Thomas Grove]

[Quitclaim, 1290 June 27, of rights in the manor of Washfield (Devon) to Henryle Abbe]

[Marriage settlement, 1665 April 20, between Alice Meredith Croft and JohnMaende]

For unbound collections of single legal documents and archival records, supply a title consisting of aword or brief phrase characterizing the type of documents making up the collection and as many ofthe title elements given above for a single legal document or archival record as is consistent with thecollection as a whole, but giving at least the extreme range of dates covered by the material. Whenappropriate, also include as part of the supplied title bulk dates for the material. Enclose bulk dates inparentheses with the designation bulk and following the inclusive dates.

[Writs, 1356–1642]

[Manor court rolls, 1282–1419 (bulk 1350–1419)]

For bound collections of compiled legal documents and archival records, supply a title consisting of aword or phrase characterizing either the type of collection itself or the type of documents making upthe collection and as many of the title elements given above for a single legal document or archivalrecord as is consistent with the collection as a whole, but giving at least the extreme range of datescovered by the material. When appropriate, also include as part of the supplied title bulk dates for thematerial. Enclose bulk dates in parentheses with the designation bulk and following the inclusive dates.

[Cartulary, 955–1316]

[Register of writs, 1295–1415]

[Mercantile records, 1476–1502 (bulk 1495–1502)]

27


1��

"!$#&%�')(�*�+�,-+�.�./')%�')(�* 0Supply the appropriate general material designation immediately following the title proper as instructedin AACR2R 1.1C.

1 1�24365/7�5�898;:�8=<?>@<?8;:�A1D1If a parallel title is a grammatically integral part of the title information, transcribe it as part of the titleproper (see 1B1).

1D2If a parallel title is not a grammatically integral part of the title information, transcribe it in a note forvariations of title.

1 BC2�DE<�FG:�7H<�>@<?8I:�>)JK�L�7?M�5�<�>�L�J1E1Transcribe all other title information following the chief title. Do not abridge other title information.

Regula Beati Francisci : confirmata a domino Pape Honorio

Officium Beate Marie Virginis : secundum consuetudinem Romane curie

The inventarye of all the goodes and chattells of John Edolf, late of New Romnye,gent., deceased : taken and priced the xx. daie of Septemb[e]r 1576 in the xviii. yere ofthe raigne of o[u]r soveraign ladye Quene Elisabeth

( N6O;PRQ"SUTOWV&XZY�V@O[Q]\� _aXbOWY;c�d_Ie�Tf[g�O[V�h6]i�Tfj The inuentarye of all the goodes and Chattells of iohnEdolf late of New Romnye gent. deceased taken and priced the xx. daie of Septembr 1576 in the xviij.yere of the raigne of or soueraign Ladye Quene Elisabeth.)

[Dawson and Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, no. 15]

L’ordre [et] police gardez en l’institution de l’Appotiquairerye, College [et] Chapellede la Charité Chrestienne : pour les pauvres honteux, prestres, escoliers,gentilzhommes, marchans [et] artisans de la ville [et] faulxbourgs de Paris, detenusen extremite de maladie / de l’invention de Nicolas Houël, Parisien

( k6l;mRnUo)p�lWq;rZs�qtlWn)u�v`wxrblWs�y`wxrbw{zbp�|�v�}�pU~ L’ORDRE & Police gardez en l’institution de l’Appotiquairerye,College & Chapelle de la Charité Chrestienne, pour les pauures honteux, Prestres, Escoliers, Gentilzhommes,Marchans & Artisans de la ville & faulxbourgs de Paris, Detenus en extremite de maladie. De l’inuentionde Nicolas Houël Parisien.)

[BnF, Manuscrits, 103–4]


28

1E2If a title proper needs explanation, supply a brief addition in the language of the cataloging agencyenclosed in square brackets as other title information.

Propheta magnus surrexit : [sermon on Luke XIV,10]

[Book of hours : use of Paris]

1 �w�R�2��9��+��+��R��M�l�V�t��8�V�8��1F1Transcribe an explicit statement of responsibility appearing in conjunction with or as a grammaticallyintegral part of title information as it appears in the source. If an explicit statement of responsibility is notpresent, neither construct or extract one from the content of an item, nor supply one. Do not abridge thestatement of responsibility. Record the names of scribes, notaries, and witnesses, etc. in a note.

Legenda aurea / de Iocabo de Voragine

Marci Catonis vita / per Leonardum Arretinum e Plutarcho in Latinum traducta

Le livre des proprietes des choses / translate de Latin en Francois l’an mil trois censsexante et douze par le commandement du Roy Charles le quint de son nom regnanten France noblement et puissaument en ce temps

Cassiodori Senatoris De institutionibus divinarum litterarum

Additiones domini Prioris Petri super Regula Sancti Salvatoris

Liber … hystorie gentis Anglorum

( �'�V��!�!�|� �r�2�&��n�t �¡w¢x�y�n�V£¤�!¥9�!��¦�<§�� ©n�>�y� : Incipit prologus venerabilis bede presbiteri. ; ��ª«��8�¦�¬§�¨�V©��t�y� : Explicit liber .v. hystorie gentis anglorum. a® Author identified as the Venerable Bede in open-ing rubric, but not in conjunction with the title proper.)

[Shailor, Beinecke Library, II:152]

1F2If the only statement of responsibility present is one that has been added at a later date (that is,absent from the chief source of information, being in a script later than that of the main body oftext), transcribe this statement in square brackets and provide a note indicating its nature andsource.

29


Rationale divinorum officiorum / [Wilelmus Durhant]

(�°�±�²�³!�µ�° ¶'·q�¶�°�²>¹$º�»x·�°nV¼�°�½'!�·¦<¾+² ±�¿n²t·y³lÀÁ³>Â�º>½2»Ã!²9Äy·Åµ�»ÅÆ>Ç Hic incipiunt rubrice libris Rationalisdivinorum officiorum qui s. liber dividitur in 8 partes …; °!½'´!¸�·¦¸<¾È²r±�¿r²t·�³`ÀÉ½'²!°rÄ�°B¾7±V´tÆ Racionaledivinorum officiorum incipit Rubrica. ; ³�ÄÃ°nµ>·¦¬¾l² ±V¿�²t·y³!Ç Explicit rationale divinorum officiorum. ; addedon fol. iii verso by a 15th-cent. English hand: “Wilelmus Durhant [corrected to “Durandus” by a 17th-cent.hand] erat nomen compilatoris huius libri ut dictum est.”)

[Dutschke, Huntington Library, II:655–56]

1F3If a statement of responsibility precedes the title proper in the chief source of information and it is nota grammatically integral part of the title proper, transpose it to its required position following the titleproper and other title information. Do not use the mark of omission. Indicate the original position ofthe statement of responsibility in a note.

1F4If there is more than one statement of responsibility appearing in conjunction with the title and state-ment of responsibility, transcribe them in the order in which they appear. If a subsequent statement ofresponsibility appears elsewhere in an item, transcribe it in a note.

Della nobilita civile / de M. Girolamo Osorio ; Portoghese tradotta in lingua Italianade Bernado Trivigiano

1F5Include all titles of nobility, address, honor, distinction, reverence, office, membership in societies, andother qualifications or descriptions that accompany names in a statement of responsibility.

Liber dyalogorum Beati Gregorii Pape Doctoris

Anicii Manlii Severini Boetii viri illustris et consularis ordinarii patricii Liber deconsolatione philosophie

De regimine principum / editus a Fratre Egidio Romano Ordinis FratrumHeremitarum Sancti Augustini

La controversie de noblesse plaidoyee entre Publius Cornelius Scipion dune part etGaius Flaminius de aultre part / laquelle a este faicte et composee par un notabledocteur en loix et grant orateur nomme Surse de Pistoye’


30

1F6If an explicit statement of responsibility for an item is incorrect or obsolete, and is not simply a variantform of the author’s name, give the correct or current attribution enclosed in square brackets. Tran-scribe in a note the incorrect or obsolete attribution.

31


� � � � � � � ��

Contents2A. Preliminary rule

2A1. Scope2A2. Punctuation2A3. Sources of information

2B. Edition / version statement2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition or version

2 �� !�"�2A1. ScopeUse this area only to record explicit statements of edition or version appearing in an item. Do not usethis area to describe the recension of a text within its manuscript tradition—place such information ina note, if desired. If an item was clearly intended as a draft, or it if carries markings indicating that itwas a stationer’s exemplar (marked “pecia” or “p” in the margin), record this information in a note fororigin (see 7B14). It will be rare that any manuscript will have a true edition or version statement. Useof this area will be very limited.

2A2. PunctuationFor instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 0C.Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal slash.Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.

2A3. Sources of informationTake information recorded in this area from the chief source of information. Record in a note thelocation within an item where this information was obtained. Enclose in square brackets all informa-tion taken from alternate sources of information.

Edition/Version Area

32

2 #%$'&)(+*-,.*0/�13254�6 798�*0/!1:8;,=<>,?6>@�6>1%,2B1If an explicit statement of edition or version appears as a grammatically integral part of a title proper,transcribe it as part of the title proper.

2B2If an explicit statement of edition or version appears anywhere else in an item not in conjunction withthe title proper, transcribe this statement in the edition / version area. If this statement appears in ahand later than that of the text, either within the item or on the binding or dorse, transcribe thisstatement and enclose it in square brackets. Whenever a statement of edition or version is transcribedseparately from the title proper provide a note detailing the source.

versio ultima

2 A'$�B�,=<=,?6>@�6>1%,�8�/�CD7�6=8"E>/+1F8�*�G=*0H�*-,.IJ7�6�H�<=,K*�1FLJ,M/N,?OP6Q6>(+*-,K*R/�13/+7S4�6>7M8�*R/+1Transcribe an explicit statement of responsibility relating to an edition or version of a work accordingto the rules given above in 2B1 and 2B2.

33


� � � � � � � � ��

3 This area is not used for manuscripts.


34

35

Place and Date of Production Area

� � � � � � ��

Contents4A. Preliminary rules

4A1. Scope4A2. Punctuation4A3. Sources of information

4B. General rules4C. Place of production4D. Date of production

4 �� !4A1. ScopeUse this area for literary manuscripts only. Do not record the place and date of production for letters,legal documents, or archival records here, as this information is already given as an element of thesupplied title for such items (see 1B2).

4A2. PunctuationFor instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 0C.Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.Precede the date of production by a comma.

4A3. Sources of informationTake information recorded in this area from the chief source of information. Seek information firstfrom a colophon or other explicit statement of place or date of production. Lacking such an explicit state-ment, derive information from any available localizable or datable textual or physical evidence (e.g., content,script, decoration, etc.). Record in a note the location within an item from which this information is obtainedand the features on which it is based. If information is obtained from an alternate source of information, suchas a reference work, published article, or scholarly communication, etc., record this source in a note. Encloseall information taken from alternate sources of information in square brackets.


36

If an item is an exact microform, photographic, or electronic reproduction, record information in thisarea appropriate to the original. Give details relating to the reproduction in a note.

4 "$#�%'&�()&�*�+ ,�*.- ,�&�/4B1Record information in this area relating to the place and date of production of an item.18

4B2Supply place and date of production information in this area as accurately as available evidence willpermit and enclose this information in square brackets.

Transcribe information in this area only as permitted in the specific rules below, in which case do notenclose this information in square brackets. If an item contains an explicit statement of place or date ofproduction, such as a colophon, transcribe this statement in a note for origin (see 7B14).

4B3If an item purports to have been produced in or at an incorrect or fictitious place and/or date, supplyonly a corrected place and/or date of production in this area. Transcribe an incorrect or fictitiousattribution in a note for origin (see 7B14).

4 0�#�1 ,2+43�&65�798:*:5�;�- 3=<?>@5�(4C1Supply a place of production for an item, as accurately as available evidence will allow, giving the place,region, or country of production in its modern form enclosed in square brackets. Do not give cardinallocations (e.g., southern Germany) in this area. Provide details of localization in a note for origin (see7B14).

[Spain]

18. AMREMM departs significantly from AACR2R, APPM, and DCRB in the treatment of this area. AACR2R treats allmanuscripts as “unpublished items” (1.4C8, 1.4D9, 1.4F9) and does not record place or agency of production informationfor manuscripts in this area, although it does record date of production information (1.4F9, 4.4B1). APPM does not recordany of this information in this area (1.4). AACR2R and DCRB emphasize transcription of information in this area togreater or lesser degree (AACR2R 1.4B4, 1.4C1, 1.4D2, 1.4D3, 1.4F1, 1.4F2, 2.16B, 2.16D, 2.16F, 4.4B1; DCRB 4A3).AMREMM recognizes the value of place and date of production information to researchers of pre-modern manuscriptsand accommodates this information in this area to facilitate ready identification and retrieval. However, manuscriptsrarely contain explicit place, agency, or date of production information and the physical and textual evidence for theirdating, localization, and identification of agency of production is the subject of scholarly research and interpretation. Evenwhen explicit information such as a colophon is present, this information must still be mediated by the bibliographicalspecialist for precision and is better transcribed in full elsewhere in a note (see 7B14). Thus, AMREMM provides placeand date of production information in this area when it is available, though not agency of production information, andfavors supplied information in a modernized form rather than transcribed information in its original form.

37


[France]

[Brittany]

[Osnabrück]

( A�BDCFEHGJIKBMLONQP�L@BRE�S6T2UVNWBXPDY.GJBXZ[B]\=^�BMP : Scriptum … in conventu Osnaburgensi per me fr. IoannemSchyphower …)

[Colophons, III:484, #11,355]

If the original form of the place of production as it appears in the item corresponds to the modernform of the name in the language of the cataloging agency, transcribe the original form and omit theuse of square brackets. If the place of production has no modern form or no longer exists, transcribethe original form from the source in the nominative or oblique case and omit the use of square brack-ets. Transcribe any explicit place of production information appearing in the item in a note for origin(see 7B14).

Paris

( A�BDCFEHGJI)BML?NQP:L_BFE S6TaUVNWBXPDYbGJBcZdBH\.eBMP : Richart de Monbaston, libraire, a fait escrire ceste legende dessains en françois lan de grace 1348 demeurant a Paris en la rue neufve nostre Dame)

[Colophons, V:231, #16,578]

4C2If the attribution of a place of production is conjectural or uncertain, follow the place of productionwith a question mark.

[England?]

[Siena?]

If no place or probable place of production can be determined, omit the place of production elementfor this area.

4C3If an item is a composite codex manuscript whose constituent parts were produced in different locali-ties, record for the place of production of the host item the widest geographical area common to allparts. If the constituent parts do not share at least a common country of production, do not record aplace of production in this area, but instead list the separate places of production in a note. If theconstituent parts are separately analyzed, supply the place of production in this area for each as appro-priate. Give the place at which a composite codex manuscript was created, if this can be ascertained, ina note for origin (see 7B14).


38

4 fhg�f6i�j4k6l�m9n:obl�pOq r=jts`l�u4D1Supply a date of production for an item as accurately as available evidence will allow, giving the dateexpressed in Arabic numerals as a year or range of years. Convert all dating systems to the New Styleof the Gregorian calendar (see 1B2.1). If the original form of the date as it appears in the item alreadycorresponds to the Arabic numeral, New Style Gregorian form, transcribe the original form and omitthe use of square brackets. Transcribe any explicit date of production information appearing in theitem in a note for origin (see 7B14).

[1399]

( v�wDxFyHzJ{|wX}e~Q�:}_wFy��6�X�V~WwX��zJwc��w��.�ewM� : Iste liber est Sancti Victoris iuxta Parisius, quem fecit scriberefrater Iohannes de Villaribus anno Domini millesimo CCCmo nonagesimo nono.)

[Samaran and Marichal, Manuscrits en écriture latine, I:247]

[1271]

( v�wDxFyHzJ{twc}�~Q�:}_way��6�a�V~[wX��XzJwc��w��.�ewM� : Escrit fu en l’an de l’incarnation N[ost]re Seignor Jhesu Crist Met IIc et LXX, o meis de jenvier. ��t� year beginning March 1)


[1455]

( v�wDxFyHzJ{KwM} ~Q�:}�wXy �6�2�V~WwX��zcwc�dwH�.�ewM� : Iste liber fuit finitus per manum Iohannis Masseri … annoDomini 1454 in ianuario … �� year beginning March 1)


1474

( v�wDxFyHzJ{|wM}=~Q�:}�wRy��6�2�V~WwX��Fz�wc��w��.�ewa� : … finita per guilhelmum de Elden Anno domini 1474. 28 dieMensis Novembris.)

[Lieftinck and Gumbert, Manuscrits dans les Pays-Bas, II:149]

4D2If no exact date can be established for an item, supply an approximate, probable, or known date orrange of dates based upon localizable or datable textual or physical evidence (e.g., content, script, deco-ration, etc.). In assigning a date, particularly on the basis of physical evidence, the difference betweenan approximate or probable date and a known date depends upon the judgment of the cataloger. As-sign dates following the paradigm set out below.

[1215?] probable exact date[ca. 1350] approximate date

39


[ca. 1350?] probable approximate date[1415?–1460] date range between a probable terminus ante quem and a known

terminus post quem[112–] known decade[112–?] probable decade[11––] known century[11––?] probable century

[between 11–– and 12––] date range within known centuries[between 11––? and 12––?] date range within probable centuries[between 1100 and 1125]* known date range within the beginning/first-quarter of the twelfth

century[between 1125 and 1150] known date range within the second-quarter of the twelfth century[between 1100 and 1150]* known date range within the first-half of the twelfth century[between 1125 and 1175] known date range within the middle of the twelfth century[between 1150 and 1199]* known date range within the second-half of the twelfth century[between 1150 and 1175] known date range within the third-quarter of the twelfth century[between 1175 and 1199]* known date range within the end/fourth-quarter of the twelfth cen-

tury[between 1175 and 1225] known date range within the end/fourth-quarter of the twelfth cen-

tury and the beginning/first-quarter of the thirteenth century

*Centuries are both recorded in this area and customarily coded in the fixed fields as running from 00 to99, although a century properly runs from 01 to 00. This practice results in the truncation by one year ofdate ranges that extend to the end of a century, but it ensures agreement of date expressions between thisarea and the fixed fields so that items will file within their appropriate centuries.

4D3If an item is a composite codex manuscript whose constituent parts were produced at different times,record for the date of production of the host item the widest range of dates of production for all parts.If the constituent parts are separately analyzed, record the date of production in this area for each asappropriate. Give the date at which a composite codex manuscript was created, if this can be ascer-tained, in a note for origin (see 7B14).


40

41

Physical Description Area

� � � � ��


5A1. Punctuation5A2. Sources of information

5B. Extent5C. Physical details

5C1. Support5C2. Illustrative matter

5D. Dimensions5E. Accompanying material

5 �� ! ��5A1. PunctuationFor instruction on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see section 0C.Precede this area with a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.Precede details of illustration or illumination by a colon.Precede dimensions by a semicolon.Precede each statement of accompanying materials by a plus sign.Enclose physical details of accompanying materials in parentheses.

5A2. Sources of informationTake information recorded in this area from the item itself.

5A3If an item is an exact microform, photographic, or electronic reproduction, record information in thisarea appropriate to the original. Give details relating to the reproduction in a note.


42

5 "$#�%�&('()!*+'Single volumes or items

5B1Record the total extent of an item according to the terminology suggested by the physical format of themanuscript. Generally, describe a manuscript in terms of leaves, regardless of whether the manuscript isfoliated or paginated, or whether these leaves are written on both sides or only one, or whether these leavesonly carry illustration or illumination, or are blank. Describe a manuscript consisting of only a single leaf asa leaf. Describe a manuscript consisting of only two conjugate leaves as a bifolium. Describe all other ar-rangements in terms of leaves, regardless of conjugacy. Thus, do not describe a manuscript consisting of fourleaves made up of two conjugate pairs as two bifolia; rather, describe it as four leaves. Describe individual,unbound single- or multiple-sheet legal documents in terms of sheets. Describe items in the form of a roll interms of a roll. For parchment and paper rolls, describe and give the number of their constituent parts(attached head to tail or head to head) in terms of membranes for parchment rolls or in terms of sheets forpaper rolls, enclosing this information in parentheses immediately following the specific material designa-tion for the roll itself. Describe manuscript fragments in terms of items.

5B2Give the total number of leaves, sheets, or membranes making up an item, followed by the appropriatespecific material designation. Count all leaves or sheets before recording the extent. Do not rely uponany numeration present in a manuscript, whether original or added later; instead, supply this informa-tion as part of the note for the statement of collation (see 7B7.1b). Include in the total extent originalraised flyleaves, original flyleaves used as pastedown or free-end endpapers, and blanks. Do not includein the total extent canceled leaves, or modern flyleaves and endpapers. Do not enclose the total extentin square brackets.

1 leaf

1 bifolium

125 leaves

2 sheets

1 roll (5 sheets)

1 roll (8 membranes)

1 item

Do not record any sequences of foliation, pagination, or other numeration in this area. Record suchinformation, instead, in the appropriate part of a note for the statement of collation (see 7B7.1b).

43


AACR2R 4.5B1 makes provision for recording certain layout features, such as number of columns andlines per page, within the statement of extent. Record this information, instead, in a note for layout(see 7B8).

5B3When giving the extent for a component part of a larger item, record the range of leaves or pagesoccupied by the component part. Use the numeration employed in the manuscript itself that is recog-nized by the holding institution to be standard for purposes of citation (i.e., do not use supercededsequences of numeration that may be present). The numeration of the range of leaves or pages given asthe extent for a component part must correspond to the numeration given for the same work in thecontents note of the host item.

leaves 5r–30v

leaves 1r–26v, 26r [bis]

p. 10–15

Multiple volumes or items

5B4If a manuscript exists in more than one volume or other specific material designation, give the totalnumber of volumes or other specific material designation immediately followed in parentheses by thetotal number of leaves, sheets, or membranes in each.

2 v. (200, 150 leaves)

3 rolls (8, 5, 10 membranes)

5B5For unbound collections of individual letters, legal documents, or archival records give the total num-ber of such documents in terms of items. Do not describe them in terms of linear feet.

83 items

5 ,.-0/21�3547698;:(<>=�?�@!:(69<�45C1. SupportName the material that serves as the writing support for an item. If the material is parchment orvellum, use the term “parchment” as the more generic, regardless of the quality of the material.

20 leaves : parchment


44

15 leaves : paper

7 leaves : papyrus

1 sheet : parchment

1 roll (10 membranes) : parchment

1 roll (5 sheets) : paper

1 roll : papyrus

5C2. Illustrative matterDescribe any illustrations, illuminations, calendars, canon tables, genealogical tables, diagrams, etc. asill. in all cases, unless there are maps present. If maps are present, give their total number. For purposesof recording information in this area, simple pen-flourished initials, line fillers, decorated catchwords,etc. are not considered as illustration or illumination. Describe these features in a note for decorationif desired. Provide details appropriate to the level of cataloging on illustration, illumination, maps, etc.in a note for decoration (see 7B10).

93 leaves : parchment, ill.

60 leaves : parchment, ill., 2 maps

5 ACB�A�D�E>F!G$H�DJI(GKH5D1Give the dimensions of a manuscript measuring first height and then width in millimeters, roundingto the nearest whole millimeter. Dimensions throughout a manuscript may vary, so measurementsgiven should be approximate dimensions representative of the whole. Give dimensions first for theleaf, then (in parentheses) for the written space, followed by the dimension as bound when appropri-ate. When providing dimensions for the written space, take note of the layout of the page whether thefirst line of text is written above the first line of ruling or below the first line of ruling (and thus frameruled).19 For manuscripts that lack frame ruling and are written above the top line, measure writtenspace from the headline or the top of minims in the first line of writing in the text to the baseline or the

19. Between the last decades of the twelfth century and the second quarter of the thirteenth, scribal practice shifted fromwriting above the first line of ruling to writing below the first line of ruling; that is, a shift from leaving the text block openat the top margin of the page to enclosing the text block within a frame of ruled lines. From about the middle of thethirteenth century, the normal practice of scribes was to write the first line of text below the first line of ruling, therebyenclosing the text block in a ruled frame. The practice of writing above the line made a prominent reappearance in thefifteenth century as a conscious attempt to imitate the layout of supposed ancient manuscripts. See N.R. Ker, “From ‘AboveTop Line’ to ‘Below Top Line’: A Change in Scribal Practice,” Celtica 5 (1960): 13–16, rpt. in Books, Collectors and Libraries:

45


bottom of minims in the last line of writing in the text. For manuscripts that are frame ruled andwritten below the first line of ruling, measure written space from the top bounding line of the frameruling to the bottom bounding line of the frame ruling. Dimensions for width in all cases should bemeasured across columns and between outer vertical bounding lines or, where these do no exist orprove unsatisfactory, between the ends of a line of text. Where dimensions of the text block and theframe ruling differ significantly, measure the actual written space. Details on ruling patterns and theirdimensions may be given in a note for layout (see 7B8).

Include within the dimensions of the written space any marginal gloss or commentary executed as partof the original text block, such as in the case of glossed biblical, legal, or philosophical texts.20 Dimen-sions of the gloss or commentary may, in addition, be given separately as part of the note for layout ifdesired. Do not include within the dimensions of the written space marginal glosses, commentary, orother annotations in a script or hand later than the script or hand of the main body of text. If it cannotbe determined whether the marginal gloss or commentary was executed as part of the original text,give dimensions for the main body of text only and provide dimensions of the gloss or commentary inthe note for layout. Also include within the dimensions of the written space any illustration, illumina-tion, or other decoration situated within the text.

60 leaves : parchment ; 254 x 171 (209 x 121) mm. bound to 259 x 176 mm.

Where leaf or other dimensions differ significantly throughout an item (e.g., from uneven trimming ordamage), express dimensions as a range.

95 leaves : parchment ; 236–246 x 176 (190 x 132) mm. bound to 253 x 183 mm.

5D2For texts written in irregular lines of verse across the page, give as dimensions for the written spaceonly the vertical measurement extending either from the headline or top of minims in the first line ofwriting in the text to the baseline or the bottom of minims in the last line of writing in the text, or if themanuscript is frame ruled from the top bounding line of the frame ruling to the bottom bounding lineof the frame ruling.

10 leaves : parchment ; 200 x 150 (160) mm. bound to 210 x 160 mm.

Studies in the Medieval Heritage, ed. Andrew G. Watson (London: Hambledon Press, 1985), 71–74; Ker, MMBL, I:viii–ix;Albert Derolez, Codicologie des manuscrits en écriture humanistique sur parchemin, 2 vols., Bibliologia: Elementa ad librorumstudia pertinentia, 5–6 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1984), I:82–85; Marco Palma, “Modifiche di alcuni aspetti materiali dellaproduzione libraria latina nei secoli XII e XIII,” Scritura e civilità 12 (1988): 119–33. Cf. Jacques Lemaire, Introduction à lacodicologie, Publications de l’Institut d’études médiévales: textes, études, congrès, 9 (Louvain-la-Neuve: Université catholiquede Louvain, 1989), 163–64.20. On the layout, ruling, and copying of glossed texts of the Bible see Christopher de Hamel, Glossed Books of the Bible and

the Origins of the Paris Booktrade (Woodbridge, Suffolk: D.S. Brewer, 1984), 14–37.


46

5D3For individual letters, legal documents, and archival records, give dimensions for the leaf or sheet only.Do not record dimensions of the written space for these materials. If these materials were originally orsubsequently folded, give dimensions as laid open.

1 sheet : parchment ; 230 x 380 mm.

5D4For items in the form of a roll, give the total length and width of the roll. Do not record dimensions ofthe written space for these materials.

1 roll (10 membranes) : parchment ; 3000 x 300 mm.

1 roll (4 sheets) : paper ; 1200 x 300 mm.

5 LNMPO�QRQTS�U�V0W�XKYRZ[XK\]U W!_aTb5ZcWad5E1Give details of accompanying materials. Briefly give the number and the name of accompanying mate-rials at the end of the physical description. Detailed description may be provided in a note. Letters andlegal documents, in particular, frequently bear seals. Record in this area only seals that are physicallypresent (either intact or fragmentary), not those that were once attached but have been subsequentlyremoved or lost. Record detailed descriptions of seals and any evidence for seals no longer present in anote for accompanying materials (see 7B13).

1 sheet : parchment ; 160 x 300 mm. + 2 seals

47


��

6 �This area is not used for manuscripts.


48

49

Note Area

� � � �


7A1. Punctuation7A2. Sources of information7A3. Transcription and editorial practice in notes7A4. Notes required in the catalog record

7A4.1. Notes required in a summary description7A4.2. Notes required in a detailed description

7B. Notes7B1. Format, nature, and scope7B2. Language7B3. Source of title and statement of responsibility7B4. Variations of title and statement of responsibility7B5. Contents

7B5.1. General rules7B5.2. Single work7B5.3. Standard or compiled work7B5.4. Multiple works

7B6. Secundo folio7B7. Statement of collation

7B7.1. Support and physical arrangement7B7.2. Register of quires7B7.3. Quire signatures, leaf signatures, and catchwords

7B8. Layout7B9. Script7B10. Decoration7B11. Music7B12. Binding7B13. Accompanying materials7B14. Origin7B15. Provenance7B16. Immediate source of acquisition7B17. Former and related shelfmarks


50

7B18. Bynames7B19. Current shelfmark7B20. Reference to published descriptions or citations7B21. Reference to published editions, facsimiles, or treatments7B22. Additional physical form7B23. Form of reproduction7B24. Restrictions on access7B25. Terms governing use and reproduction7B26. Location of originals / reproductions7B27. Cataloging history

7 �� 7A1. PunctuationPrecede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed, but not precededby, a space.

7A2. Sources of informationTake data recorded in notes from any suitable source. Square brackets are required for interpolationswithin quoted material and as set out in 7A3.

7A3. Transcription and editorial practice in notesA cataloging agency may employ in the note area any method of transcribing source text deemedappropriate, so long as that method is a clear and consistent one. It is recommended that the methoddefined for use in the title and statement of responsibility area (see 0F1–0F8) also be applied as aminimum standard for transcription in the notes, although abbreviations may be expanded silently inorder to provide a more easily readable text. If a more detailed transcription is desired to record certaincharacteristics of the text, such as original punctuation, or additions, suppressions, or substitutions tothe text, a cataloging agency may choose to employ a semi-diplomatic method of transcription.21

Enclose transcribed text in the notes in quotation marks. The method for representing the extent of awork present in a given manuscript is generally to transcribe portions of the text of that work in thefollowing order:

• Opening rubric• Incipit• Explicit• Closing rubric

21. See, e.g., François Masai, “Principes et conventions de l’édition diplomatique,” Scriptorium 4 (1950): 177–93; AnthonyG. Petti, English Literary Hands from Chaucer to Dryden (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1977), 34–35.

51

Note Area

Precede transcribed rubrics with the designation “[rubr.]” and precede the incipit of the following textwith the designation “[text]” (printed manuscript catalogs customarily distinguish rubrics from textthrough the use of alternating italic and roman type faces). Transcribe rubrics in full. Transcribe asmuch of an incipit as will distinguish a particular text or version of a work and as much of an explicitas will indicate the extent and conclusion of that text. Use the mark of omission to indicate the conti-nuity of any untranscribed text between opening rubric, incipit, explicit, and closing rubric. Where thecontinuity of the text of a work broken, transcribe the text immediately preceding and following thediscontinuity. Thus,

“[rubr.] opening rubric. [text] incipit … explicit. [rubr.] closing rubric.”

See 7B5.2 for examples.

7A4. Notes required in the catalog recordThe following notes required in the catalog record define only a minimum set of notes for eachlevel of description. Notes may be selectively augmented, abbreviated, or added according to localcataloging policies and requirements. For instance, an institution choosing to create summarydescriptions for its holdings may wish to emphasize the decorative elements of these mate-rials and so provide extensive notes on decoration equivalent to those normally given in adetailed description. In all cases, information is supplied on the basis of its applicabilityand availability.22

Distinctions between summary and detailed description are not absolute. Both levels of descriptioncontain virtually the same set of notes (detailed description, for instance, adds notes on Statement ofcollation and Accompanying materials), but the meaningful difference lies in the degree of detail that

7A4.1. Notes required in a summarydescriptionA summary description requires at least all thenotes set out below to be included in the cata-log record, if applicable and available:

7B1. Format, nature, and scope7B2. Language7B3. Source of title proper and statement

of responsibility

7A4.2. Notes required in a detaileddescriptionA detailed description requires at least all thenotes set out below to be included in the cata-log record, if applicable and available:

7B1. Format, nature, and scope7B2. Language7B3. Source of title proper and statement

of responsibility7B4. Variations of title and statement of re-

sponsibility

22. Availability of information can be highly variable. It depends in each case upon the expertise either possessed by theindividual cataloger or provided by a bibliographical specialist or by an already existing description. For instance, aninability to identify precisely a grade of script or decorative feature renders that information unavailable.


52

each conveys and the amount of expertise and judgment required to provide that additional informa-tion. Outlines for summary and detailed descriptions are supplied here as guides in determining theamount of work required for each record. Summary description may be characterized as containinginformation that is immediately observable or identifiable and detailed description as containing fullerinformation resulting from further examination and research.

7 ��! �"$# %Generally, make notes as set out below and in the order given. At any point, a general note may beintroduced to provide supplemental or related information to any of the specific notes below. Groupassociated notes together. A general note may also be introduced at any appropriate point in the de-scription to record information not addressed by any of the specific notes below.

7B1. Format, nature, and scopeMake notes on the format, nature, and scope of a manuscript or manuscript collection.

7B5. Contents

7B8. Layout (brief note indicating numberof columns and lines of text)

7B9. Script (brief note indicating general typeof script)

7B10. Decoration (brief note indicating pres-ence of illumination or other significantdecoration)

7B11. Music (brief note indicating presence ofmusic)

7B12. Binding (brief note identifying bindingas contemporary or modern)

7B13. Accompanying materials (brief note)7B14. Origin (brief note indicating immedi-

ately identifiable place, date, and agencyof production, i.e. colophon)

7B17. Former and related shelfmarks7B18. Bynames7B19. Current shelfmark7B20. Reference to published descriptions

or citations7B21. Reference to published editions, fac-

similes, or treatments7B23. Form of reproduction7B27. Cataloging history

7B5. Contents (full note)7B7. Statement of collation7B8. Layout (full note)

7B9. Script (full note)

7B10. Decoration (full note)

7B11. Music (full note)

7B12. Binding (full note)

7B13. Accompanying materials (full note)7B14. Origin (full note)7B15. Provenance7B16. Immediate source of acquisition7B17. Former and related shelfmarks7B18. Bynames7B19. Current shelfmark7B20. Reference to published descriptions

or citations7B21. Reference to published editions, fac-

similes, or treatments7B23. Form of reproduction7B27. Cataloging history

53

Note Area

7B1.1Give brief information on the physical format of an item or items. Use one of the following designa-tions as appropriate:

Ms. or Mss. Apply generally to all manuscript items not addressed more specificallybelow.

Whenever possible, apply one of the following specific designations:

Ms. fragment(s) Apply to an item or items consisting of a portion excised or remainingfrom a MS. LEAF or from the sheet or leaf of a letter, legal document, orarchival record, etc. (e.g., a cutting of an illuminated initial, a heavilydamaged leaf ). If these fragments are from disparate leaves or sheets,indicate this fact further in the note for nature and scope.

Ms. leaf or leaves Apply to an item or items consisting of one or more individual leaves orsheets or unsewn bifolia remaining or excised from a MS. CODEX. If theseleaves are from disparate manuscript codices, indicate this fact at a laterpoint in the note for nature and scope.

Ms. gathering(s) Apply to an item or items consisting of two or more sewn bifolia or com-bination of sewn bifolia and disjunct leaves remaining or excised from aMS. CODEX.

Ms. component part Apply only to an item (i.e., work) given separate analysis (see AppendixB) that is part of a MS. CODEX for which a host-item catalog record alsoexists.

Ms. codex Apply to an item consisting of one or more sewn gatherings bound to-gether constituting a book. Designate a MS. CODEX that has been dis-membered or damaged to such an extent that it no longer presents asingle coherent work as MS. FRAGMENTS(S), MS. LEAF or LEAVES, or MS.GATHERINGS(S). For instance, if all that remains of a MS. CODEX is asingle quire of eight leaves containing chapter 2 of a larger work, desig-nate this item as MS. GATHERING. However, if this quire contains thewhole of the work, designate the item as MS. CODEX.

Ms. composite codex Apply to a MS. CODEX composed of two or more physical parts of varyingdate of production and origin that have been subsequently bound together.Do not apply this designation to a MS. CODEX simply possessing frag-ments reused from another manuscript as flyleaves or binding material,or to a MS. CODEX containing multiple works of homogenous date of pro-duction and origin.


54

Ms. document(s) Apply to an item or items constituting a letter, legal document, or archi-val record, regardless of physical format.

Ms. roll(s) Apply to an item or items consisting of two or more paper sheets or parch-ment membranes joined together, or of a single long sheet or membrane,rolled to form a cylinder.

7B1.2Give a brief summary or abstract of the nature and scope of the contents of an item, if this information is notmore appropriately treated elsewhere in the description. Give notice particularly of significant versions of atext or textual defects. Note also any physical defects in an item that also affect the text. If an item containsimportant or extensive glossing, commentary, or other annotation, make note of its presence. Also recordwhether an item possesses any special physical characteristics, such as whether it is a holograph, palimpsest,opisthograph, or chirograph or indenture. If the catalog record is intended to provide only an abstract in lieuof fuller information available elsewhere, such as an already published description (see 0B1.1, 7B20), providea note indicating the nature and location of this fuller description.

Bible arranged in usual order with common set of prologues (see Ker, Medieval Manu-scripts in British Libraries, I: 96–97)

Text of the Psalms with the Ordinary Gloss

Text heavily annotated by a 16th-cent. hand

Collection of 132 documents (1580–1710) pertaining to property holdings of theHale family in Hertfordshire, Cambridgeshire, Bedfordshire, Berkshire, and London.The manors of King’s Walden (Herts.), White Waltham (Berks.), and Edworth (Beds.)are particularly well documented

See printed catalog for full description

7B2. LanguageIdentify the language or languages employed in an item and make concise notes on their use. Forcomposite manuscript codices, briefly note the various languages employed throughout and providemore detailed notes in the records for individually analyzed works if desired.

Latin

Old French

Latin, with interlinear glosses in Old English

Latin and Old French

55

Note Area

7B3. Source of title proper and statement of responsibilityIndicate the source of the title proper and statement of responsibility and the exact location within anitem where the information is found, using the numeration employed in the manuscript itself that isrecognized by the holding institution to be standard for purposes of citation. If the title proper andstatement of responsibility is in a script or hand later than the main body of text of the manuscript,indicate an approximate date when it may have been added.

Title from rubric (fol. 2v)

Title from colophon (fol. 80r)

Title from table of contents (fol. 1r)

Title from spine, 17th cent.

Title added at head of text, 15th cent. (fol. 1r)

Title and statement of responsibility from printed catalog

Title supplied by cataloger

7B4. Variations of title and statement of responsibilityMake notes on significant variations of the title and statement of responsibility that are not alreadytranscribed elsewhere. Transcribe these variations and indicate their location within an item. Also,transcribe parallel titles and other title information if they are considered to be important.

Running title (passim): Consulta Basilii

Title in prologue (fol. 1r): Regula Beati Basilii episcopi

Title in explicit (fol. 93v): Consulta Basilii que dicuntur regula eiusdem

7B5. Contents

7B5.1. General rules

7B5.1.1The contents note functions in two capacities depending upon the level of description employed in thecatalog record (see 0D) and the nature of the item itself. The format and the amount and complexityof information the contents note conveys are conditioned by a variety of factors: whether the manu-script contains a single work or a standard or compiled work or multiple works, the level of descriptionin the catalog record, and the information available from the source. In the case of an item containinga single work, the contents note indicates the particular text or version of that work and the extent to


56

which the text of that work is complete in the manuscript. In the case of an item containing a standardor compiled work or an item containing multiple works, it indicates the component works or itemscontained within the manuscript. Follow the instructions below for constructing the contents note.The particular examples given should be taken only as guides, not as prescriptive patterns, for format-ting the contents note. The cataloger is free to improvise if none of the provisions given here satisfiesthe needs of the item being cataloged.

To determine the appropriate capacity and complexity of the contents note, follow the guide belowaccording to the level of description employed and the nature of the contents of the item:

Summary description—

a) Single workDo not provide a contents note

b) Standard or compiled workProvide a contents note only for a compiled work according to 7B5.3

c) Multiple worksProvide a contents note according to 7B5.4

Detailed description—

a) Single workProvide a contents note according to 7B5.2

b) Standard or compiled workProvide a contents note according to 7B5.3

c) Multiple worksProvide a contents note for the host item according to 7B5.4, and a contents note foreach separately analyzed work according to 7B5.2

7B5.1.2Generally, list the contents of an item in full, including blank pages. Contents descriptions shouldpresent the fullest amount of information possible in a clear, accurate, and economical fashion. How-ever, materials that are ancillary or of marginal significance may be summarized. The structure ofthe contents note should normally reflect the structure and order of elements as they appear inthe manuscript. Assign Arabic numbers to each work or item contained in the manuscript ac-cording to the cataloger’s division of its elements, beginning each entry as a separate paragraph.Precede each work or item contained in the manuscript with its folio or page reference (eitherinclusive or beginning folio or page). Provide references and commentary on the state of the textof the work or item as needed.

57

Note Area

If information is not available to furnish a contents note according to any of the following rules, pro-vide whatever information that is available in as clear and accurate a manner as possible.

7B5.2. Single workTranscribe, in the order in which they appear, the opening rubric, incipit, explicit, and closing rubricfor the text of a work. See 7A3 for methods of transcription.

fol. 1r–4r: “[rubr.] Incipit regula sancti Augustini episcopi. [text] Ante omnia fratreskarissimi diligatur Deus, deinde proximus … orans ut sibi debitum dimittatur et intemptationem non inducatur. [rubr.] Explicit regula sancti Augustini.”

When a text is preceded by preliminary matter (e.g., tables of contents, translator’s prefaces, prologues,etc.) record at least the opening rubrics and incipits for these preliminaries. When a text is organizedinto books, parts, or other major divisions, record the opening rubrics, incipits, and explicits (andoptionally the closing rubrics) for these divisions if considered necessary or desirable for clarity. Ifsignaling the presence of these major divisions is not considered necessary or desirable, give only theopening rubric, incipit, explicit, and closing rubric of the entire text as shown above. Where confusionmay arise in the designation of what is preliminary matter, major division, and main text, indicate insquare brackets the part of the text being cited if this is not already made clear by the rubric or incipititself. &('�)$*,+-)$*/.0)1'2*,+$34)65�387:9�*/34)<;�*/=>9?)�.A@B9<*C'�=?D .�EF=G'H@I':;�JK+ILNMO9QP<' =15�3,RG3/.S3C'�)�.ILT9H)65UMO9H34)V*C+>W�*X'HY�9

Z ' =C[V34)VM\JT@I*/3 E]@C+_ 'X'H[�.-a(PL = Patrologia latina)

1. fol. 1r–33v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologus beati Iheronimi presbyteri in primum librum de vitiset doctrinis sanctorum patrum. [text] Benedictus Deus qui vult omnes homines salvosfieri … ; [fol. 2r: rubr.] Incipit liber primus de vitis et doctrinis sanctorum patrum editusab Iheronimo. De sancto Iohanne abbate capitulum primum. [text] Primum igiturtamquam verum fundamentum nostri operis … et tanta nobis ostendit mirabilia ipsi gloriain secula seculorum. Amen. [rubr.] Explicit primus vitaspatrum.” [PL 21:387–462].

2. fol. 33v–62v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologus in librum secundum. [text] Vere mundum quis dubitetmeritis stare sanctorum … ; [fol. 34r: rubr.] Incipit liber secundus de verbis et doctrinissanctorum patrum. [text] Quidam sanctorum seniorum patrum interrogantibus semonachis de causa abstinere dixit … quia interiori homini nostro sanitas inde crescit.[rubr.] Explicit liber secundus.” [PL 73:739–810] …

[Dutschke and Rouse, Claremont Libraries, 6–7]b 3/MUE$@83cY/3B+N5\7G'N)�*,+-)$*/.U)1'�*,+d3Q)$5�3/7-9K*834)�;e'�)K@cfg*4h1+�'-Ei+-) 3Q) ;j=�J��=>3B7�9H)65�34)]7A3 E�3k*'<Yl*4h1+E�=-'T@C'?;]JK+�L�9H)65m*8h1+n'AE+-) 3Q) ;o=TJ� =A3B7/L�34)]7p3 E13C*qL +AWGE$@83B7>3B*rL 9H)�5o7A@C'�.p3Q) ;�=TJK =p3B7i'HYi*rh1+_*C+>W0* 'NY9 Z '�=I[�7:'�MsE]@C+N*,+i34)�Y/3,R?+_ 'X'T[0.tBMu9QP<' =�5�3,RG34.p3C'<)2.$)1' *�34)$5�387-9�*,+H5 vGa1. fol. 1r: blank.


58

2. fol. 1v–149v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologus venerabilis Bede presbiteri. [text] Gloriosissimo regiCeolvulfo Beda famulus christi et prespiter. Hystoriam gentis anglorum ecclesiasticamquam … ; [fol. 4r: rubr.] Britania oceani insula. [text] Cui quondam Albion nomen erat …letentur insule multe et confiteantur memorie sanctitatis eius. [rubr.] Explicit liber .v.hystorie gentis Anglorum.”


7B5.3. Standard or compiled workFor certain standard works whose contents vary within a defined set of texts (e.g., the Bible or liturgi-cal and devotional works), or for compiled works (e.g., collections of sermons, hymns, letters, laws andstatutes, charters, writs, and other legal documents, etc.), the normal sequence of opening rubrics,incipits, explicits, and closing rubrics need not be given. Instead, a cataloger’s summary or suppliedtitle, citation to a standard reference bibliography, or simply the rubric as it appears in the manu-script—or a combination of all of these—may be used. It may, however, be desirable in certain in-stances to transcribe the opening rubrics, incipits, explicits, and closing rubrics for the sake of clarityand accuracy.wix,yNzC{:|

(Two examples showing increasing levels of complexity and detail for the same work, though notfor the same manuscript.)

fol. 1r–612v: Bible in usual order (see Ker, Medieval Manuscripts in British LibrariesI:96–97), prologues cited precede text: General Prologue [Stegmüller 284]; Prologueto Pentateuch [Stegmüller 285], Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, Deuteronomy;Joshua [Stegmüller 311]; Judges; Ruth; 1 Kings [Stegmüller 323] …


fol. 1r–344v, Old Testament. fol. 1r–3r: “[rubr.] Incipit epistola beati Ieronimi adPaulinum presbiterum de omnibus divinis historiis libris.” [Stegmüller 284]; fol. 3r:“[rubr.] Alius prologus.” [Stegmüller 285]; fol. 3r–18r: Genesis; fol. 18v–31r: “[rubr.]Incipit liber Exodi.” fol. 31r–39v: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Levitici.” fol. 39v–51v: “[rubr.]Incipit liber Numeri.” fol. 51v–62r: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Deuteronomii.” fol. 62r+v:“[rubr.] Incipit prologus super librum Iosue.” [Stegmüller 311]; fol. 62v–70r: “[rubr.]Incipit liber Iosue.” fol. 70r–77v: “[rubr.] Hic incipit liber Iudicum.” fol. 77v–78v:“[rubr.] Incipit liber Ruth.” fol. 78v–79r: “[rubr.] Prologus.” [in Reg.; Stegmüller 323];fol. 79r–90r: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Regum primus.” …

[Dutschke and Rouse, Claremont Libraries, 18]w~} }H��}<��e}X��>�1. fol. 1r–12v: Calendar including the feasts of Herculanus (1 March), Zenobius (25

May, in red), Proculus (1 June), Laurentinus and Pergentinus (3 June), Alexanderbishop (6 June), Romulus (6 July), Nabor and Felix (12 July), Anne (26 July), “Sancte

59

Note Area

Marie ad nives” (5 August, in red), Transfiguration (6 August, in red), Donatus (7August), Concordia (13 August), Potitus (6 September), Salvius (10 September),Reparata (8 October, in red), Cerbonius (10 October), “Fidriani” [sic, for Frediano;18 November], Florentinus bishop (30 December).

2. fol. 13r–111v: “[rubr.] Incipit offitium beate Marie virginis secundumconsuetudinem romane curie.”

3. fol. 112r–176v: Office of the Dead. fol. 177r+v ruled but blank.4. fol. 178r–214r: Long Hours of the Cross. fol. 214v–215v ruled but blank.5. fol. 216r–221r: Short Hours of the Cross. fol. 221v ruled but blank.6. fol. 222r–239r: Penitential psalms.7. fol. 239r–252r: Litany, including Zenobius. fol. 252v ruled but blank.

[Dutschke and Rouse, Claremont Libraries, 5–6]�(�N�Q�C�?�T�8�I�T��H��F�N�_��H�$��1�8�K�k�X�,�G�-�H��A��6�d�_�H�H�B��:�$�m��8��X�,�G�_�,�d�� n�N�-�o p (SR = Statutes of the Realm)

1. fol. 1r–6v: Sarum calendar in purple, red, and black, partly graded. Added obit of“Thomas Minstrecha miles,” A.D. 1452, at 19 Nov.

2. fol. 7v–12v: Table of statutes and chapters.3. fol. 13r: “[rubr.] Magna carta. [text] Edwardus dei gracia … T. Edwardo filio nostro

apud Westm’ xi [sic] die Octobris anno regni nostri xxv. Dat’ per manum nostramapud Westm’ xxviii die Marcii anno regni nostri xxix [sic].” [SR I:116].

4. fol. 20r: “[rubr.] Incipit sentencia eiusdem carta.” [SR I:6].5. fol. 21r: “[rubr.] Incipit carta de foresta.” Confirmation of 12 [sic] Oct. 1297 [SR

I:120].6. fol. 24v: “[rubr.] Incipiunt provisiones de Merton.” [SR I:1].7. fol. 28v: “[rubr.] Incipit Statutum de Marlebergh.” [SR I:19].8. fol. 39r: “[rubr.] Incipit Statutum Westm’ primi.” In French. [SR I:26].9. fol. 58r: “[rubr.] Incipit Statutum Gloucestr’.” In French. [SR I:45].10. fol. 63r: “[rubr.] Incipiunt explanaciones eiusdem.” [SR I:50] …

[N.R. Ker, MMBL, I:68]

7B5.4. Multiple worksFor a manuscript containing multiple works or items for which separate analysis may or may not beprovided, briefly list the contents of the manuscript using uniform or cataloger-supplied titles andauthor information. Prefer uniform titles and authorized forms of authors’ names, but if titles exist inthe manuscript these may be used if desired. If separate analysis is given to these works, provide acontents note for each analytic record according to the procedure given in 7B5.2.

1. fol. 1r–93v: Regula / Saint Basil, Bishop of Caesarea.2. fol. 94r–160v: De institutis coenobiorum et de octo principalium vitiorum remediis

libri XII / John Cassian.3. fol. 161r–211v: Regula / Saint Benedict, Abbot of Monte Cassino.


60

4. fol. 211v–259v: Liber de praecepto et dispensatione / Saint Bernard of Clairvaux.5. fol. 259v–268v: Praeceptum / Saint Augustine, Bishop of Hippo.

7B6. Secundo folioTranscribe the opening word or words from the second leaf of a manuscript that may have been part ofan institutional collection during the Middle Ages. Do not normally record secundo folio references formanuscripts commonly found, or known to have been, in private ownership during the Middle Ages(such as books of hours), for manuscripts from a period later than the Middle Ages, or for manu-scripts that have clearly lost their second leaf at some later time. Precede this note with the headingSecundo folio:.

The secundo folio citation can refer equally to both the physical manuscript and the work it contains.Thus, if the second leaf of a manuscript is occupied by notes, tables of contents, calendars, canontables, or other preliminary matter, transcribe the opening words for that second leaf, as well as theopening words of the text from the second leaf of a work contained in a manuscript. If a compositemanuscript codex brings together at a later date works that may once have existed separately, it may bedesirable to provide secundo folio references for each of those individual works. If the second leaf isoccupied by text and accompanying commentary, give the opening words for both the text and thecommentary. If the first word on the second leaf is subject to word division, supply the missing infor-mation in square brackets from the preceding leaf.

Secundo folio: desiderium flagrans

Secundo folio [text]: tempus predicteSecundo folio [commentary]: Cum accessissent

Secundo folio [calendar, fol. 3r]: KL MarciusSecundo folio [text, fol. 9r]: [in exi]tu hii

Certain regional medieval traditions of cataloging (e.g., Spain) systematically recorded the openingwords of leaves other than those appearing on the second. If the provenance of an item places it withinthis context, transcribe this information under the note for secundo folio and provide a note detailing thespecial circumstance.

7B7. Statement of collationThe statement of collation consists of three parts:

1. Support and physical arrangement2. Register of quires3. Quire signatures, leaf signatures, and catchwords

61

Note Area

Separate each part of the statement of collation from the one following it by a space-semi-colon-space.Follow the steps below in constructing the statement of collation. Enclose any necessary qualifyinginformation in parentheses at the appropriate point in the statement to which it refers. Precede thisnote with the heading Collation:.

7B7.1 Support and physical arrangement

a) Specify the material, or support, on which an item is written. If the support is mixed, place at thehead of the formula the predominant material used for support and register any differences in materialused at the appropriate point in the formula. Identify watermarks in paper as clearly as possible withconcise citation to standard reference sources.

ParchmentPaper (Briquet, Couronne, 4736)

b) Record the extent of an item by giving first the number of flyleaves at the front, then thenumber of leaves making up the body, and last the number of flyleaves at the end of the manu-script. Use lower-case roman numerals to designate flyleaves and Arabic numerals to designateleaves in the main body of the manuscript. Indicate the material used for the flyleaves and recordany other information pertaining to them in parentheses at the point at which they are regis-tered. Unless further qualification is given, the number of leaves given for the body of the manu-script is assumed also to express the present numeration of the manuscript—if any exists—byfolio, regardless of whether that numeration is original or added later. If the leaves are pagi-nated, or if there is a disturbance in the foliation, indicate the correct sequence in paren-theses. Older sequences of numeration may be noted if desired. Flyleaves are assumed to beunnumbered, unless stated otherwise, and also to be contemporary with the binding unlessstated otherwise. Concise remarks on the state of flyleaves or pastedowns may be includedin the collational formula.

fol. ii + 20 + ii

fol. iii + 292 (foliated 1–11, 11*, 12–291) + iv

fol. ii + 100 (paginated 1-200) + ii

fol. ii (paper) + 150 + ii (paper)

fol. ii (medieval parchment) + 245 + ii (medieval parchment)

fol. ii (i is pastedown) + 58 + ii (ii is pastedown)


62

7B7.2 Register of quiresRecord the sequence and composition of the quires that make up a manuscript. Use a formula toexpress collation that is clear, consistent, and as widely understood as possible. Use current Anglo-American conventions for manuscript collation based upon the system described by N.R. Ker, Cata-logue of Manuscripts Containing Anglo-Saxon (Oxford, 1957), xxii (reprinted in MMBL, III:vii).23

1–118(+9)

18 28(+1, fol. 9, before 1)

18 2–412 512(+7, 8; fol. 51–52) 6–1512

1–48 58(± 4) 6–106 116(4+1) 1210(–3.8)

16(1 is pastedown) 2–68 76(6 is pastedown)

16 2–68 78(–8, following fol. 53, with loss of text) 8–148 152(conjugate pair)

1–68 | 7–188 | 19–208

I–XIII8, XIV10(–2, 6 blanks)

7B7.3 Quire signatures, leaf signatures, and catchwordsMake notes on the presence of quire signatures, leaf signatures, and catchwords at the end of thestatement of collation.24 The usual placement for quire signatures is presumed to be on the verso ofthe last leaf of each gathering; specify “on recto” if these appear instead on the recto of the first leaf ofthe gathering. The usual placement for leaf signatures is presumed to be on the recto of the first leavesof each gathering. The usual placement for catchwords is presumed to be at the bottom of the verso ofthe last leaf of each gathering; specify orientation (e.g., horizontal, vertical, diagonal) and location onleaf if otherwise.

Quires signed i–viii

Quires signed on recto I–X

Quires signed a–m

23. See also M. R. James, A Descriptive Catalogue of the Manuscripts in the Fitzwilliam Museum (Cambridge: CambridgeUniversity Press, 1895), xix–xxiii. For historical and bibliographic orientation see Frank Bischoff, “Methoden derLagenbeschreibung,” Scriptorium 46 (1992): 3–27.24. On the variety of forms and locations of quire signatures, leaf signatures, and catchwords, see Lemaire, Introduction à

la codicologie, 61–67; Derolez, Codicologie, I:40–64; J. Vezin, “Observations sur l’emploi des réclames dans les manuscritslatins,” Bibliothèque de l’École des chartes 125 (1967): 5–33; Ker, MMBL, I:ix–x.

63

Note Area

Leaves signed aiii–giii

Horizontal catchwords in inner margin

Horizontal catchwords to right of center

Vertical catchwords

Decorated catchwords, leaves signed on recto a–d5, e4, f–g5¡�¢K£T¤d¥]¦C§H¨Collation: Parchment, fol. ii (paper: Briquet Armoiries, 1656) + 66 + ii (paper: Bri-quet Armoiries, 1656) ; 1–106 118(–2, 6) ; quires signed i–xi

Collation: Parchment, fol. iii (modern paper) + ii (medieval parchment, ruled butblank) + 248 + ii (medieval parchment, ruled but blank) + iii (modern paper) ; 12

28(–1, fol. 1, with loss of text) 3–1010 1110(–4, fol. 92, without loss of text) 12–2610 272

; horizontal catchwords in red ink frames

7B8. Layout25

Describe the page layout of an item to whatever degree and level is deemed appropriate. At a mini-mum, give notice of the number of lines of text, the number of columns (if more than one) intowhich the text is divided, and whether the text is plain ruled or frame-ruled. More detailed noteson layout may take account of whether text is written above or below the top line of ruling (see 5D1), rulingpatterns, prickings in the margins, layout of glosses, etc. Precede this note with the heading Layout:.

Layout: Written in 25 long lines; frame-ruled

Layout: Written in 2 columns of 35 lines, above line; ruled

Layout: Written in 2 columns of 30 lines; frame-ruled in ink with double inner and outervertical bounding lines; prickings in outer margin

Layout: Written in 2 columns, below top line, 20 lines for text, 40 lines for commentary. Textruled in lead on alternate lines in inner column; continuous commentary ruled in drypoint in outer column

25. AACR2R 4.5B1 makes provision for recording certain layout features, such as number of columns and lines per page,within the statement of extent. Record this information, instead, in a note for layout (cf. 5B2).


64

7B9. ScriptIdentify the script in which an item is written to whatever degree and level is deemed appropriate. Ata minimum, identify the type and grade of script (q.v.) used for the main body of text of a manuscript.Use a standard and consistent nomenclature. If known, identify the scribe, notary, or corrector respon-sible for the production of an item. If possible, distinguish between the hands of multiple scribes,indicating the leaves upon which each worked. If the determination of dating and localization of anitem has been arrived at by means of the script, identify the relevant palaeographical features. Precedethis note with the heading Script:.

Script: Written in a chancery hand

Script: Written in medium grade, gothic book script (littera minuscula gothica textualis libraria)

Script: Written in insular phase II half-uncial, with interlinear Old English gloss in Anglo-Saxon pointed minuscule

Script: Written by 3 scribes in an early Anglicana book script (Anglicana formata): scribe 1,fol. 1r–75v; scribe 2, fol. 75v–140r; scribe 3, fol. 140r–210v

7B10. DecorationDescribe the decorative features of an item to whatever degree and level is deemed appropriate. At aminimum, give notice of the presence of illumination. Generally, describe initials and miniatures interms of the number of lines of text or space on the page they occupy. The pattern of the descriptionshould generally begin with the most complex or elaborate decoration and follow a descending orderto the most simple. Provide overall artistic commentary, if desired, following the statement of decora-tion. If known, identify the artist(s) or workshop responsible for the decoration of a manuscript. Pre-cede this note with the heading Decoration:.26

In general, follow the hierarchy set out below in ordering the description.27 Prominence of one or otherelements of the decoration, however, may give these elements precedence in the order of description:

26. Useful guides to technical terminology in describing the decorative elements of a manuscript are: Pilar Ostos, et al.,Vocabulario codicología, Instrumenta bibliológica (Madrid: Arcos Libros, 1997); Marilena Maniaci, Terminologia del libromanoscritto, Addenda: studi sulla conoscenza la conservazione e il restauro del material librario, 3 (Roma: Istituto centraleper la patologia del libro, 1996); Michelle P. Brown, Understanding Illuminated Manuscripts: A Guide to Technical Terms (Malibu,Calif.: J. Paul Getty Museum; London: British Library, 1994); École des hautes études en sciences sociales, Paris. Grouped’anthropologie historique de l’Occident médiéval, Thésaurus des images médiévales pour la constitution de bases de donnéesiconographiques (Paris: Centre de recherches historiques; École des hautes études en sciences sociales, 1993); ChristineJakobi, Buchmalerei: Ihre Terminologie in der Kunstgeschichte (Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1991); Denis Muzerelle, Vocabulairecodicologique: Répertoire méthodique des termes français relatifs aux manuscrits, Rubricae, 1 (Paris: CEMI, 1985); François Garnier,Thesaurus iconographique: Système descriptif des représetations, (Paris: Le Léopard d’Or, 1984); François Garnier, Le Langage del’image au Moyen Âge, 2 vols. (Paris: Le Léopard d’Or, 1982); and Lucia N. Valentine, Ornament in Medieval Manuscripts: AGlossary (London: Faber and Faber, 1965).

27. This hierarchy is derived from Lilian M. C. Randall, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the Walters Art Gallery,

65

Note Area

canon tables / calendars / carpet pages / evangelist, author, and donor portraits / miniatures / otherillustrations / historiated, inhabited, anthropomorphic, zoomorphic, and zoo-anthropomorphic ini-tials / decorated, illuminated, and painted initials / pen-flourished and penwork initials / ornamented,painted, and flourished capitals / line fillers / borders / drolleries and marginal illustrations / pen-sprays

Decoration: Illuminated initials and ten miniatures

Decoration: Historiated initials at head of each chapter

Decoration: Pen-flourished initials throughout

Decoration: Primary (5- to 6-line) and secondary (2- to 3-line) pen-flourished ini-tials throughout

Decoration: Historiated initials (8-line) at head of each chapter (fols. 1r, 25r, 40r, 61v,80r)©:ªn«1¬�k®<c,®K°±Q² ³m6¬HµB¶?±4,¬Hm¬A· ¶Td¹]C¬�±8º�¶ 2¶k¹_µB¬H»¶H²6»¶<¼ ½A±,N³0¬:�¾½p® ¿µr«1¬0¬Gº-Àp½p± ¹_µ8±C®<²u®N¶»Á Â Ã Ä>ÅBÆ-Ç-È�ÉkÊ�ËSÌVÍ$ÎNËAÏ8ÐSÏ8ÎHÈ»ÑFÐpÎ:ÒkÉ,ÇGËÏ4È\ÓNË-Ô0ÇpË�ÉIÓ»ÏqÒQÒ¾Ê�Ð?É8Ë-Î�É,ÇdÉ4Õ1Ç�Ñ1ËpÏQÈ]ÆpÏ Ñ]ÒCÇ�ÓNÖ�Õ]Ï/ÇGË-ÎHËpÆSÕKÌ�ÓNÖÔ0ÇGÐ>Æ>ËAÏ Ñ_É8ÏCÓ�ÈmÏ4ÈVÎ�Ô0ÇGÆGÓ�ËAÎ�É/ÏIÓ<ÈmÈ]Ó�ÉIÇ~ÓNË�È6Ó2É,ÇGÐ>× Ø

28

Decoration 1: Calendar illustrations: fol. ir, Jan. ( Janus Feasting / Aquarius); fol. ivr,Feb. (Unshod man by fire holding boot / Pisces) …

Decoration 2: Historiated initials, major Psalm divisions: fol. 7r, Ps. I, B (King Davidplaying harp in upper compartment / David beheading Goliath in lower compartment);fol. 49r, Ps. 38, D (David kneeling and pointing to eyes before enthroned Christ) …

Decoration 3: Decorated illuminated initials: (a) 4-line gold “KL” in calendar on bi-partite rose and blue ground patterned in white; (b) 2-line Psalm initials, other thanmajor divisions, alternately in rose and blue, simply patterned in white, on rectangulargrounds of opposite color, in-filled with foliate- or dragon-rinceau, some incorporat-ing head of human or beast, bird, quadruped, or hybrid, with bird or quadrupedperched atop some initials.

Decoration 4: Flourished initials: (a) Psalm versal, set off: gold and blue alternately,flourished in blue and red respectively; Dominical letters “A” in calendar: blue, flour-ished in red.

3 vols (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1988–97), I:xxv–xxvi, and passim. See also “Hierarchy” in Brown, Un-derstanding Illumated Manuscripts.28. Baltimore, Walters Art Museum, MS. W. 58. See Randall, Walters Art Gallery, I:51.


66

Decoration 5: Line-fillers: Red, gold, and blue stylized foliate or geometric patterns,regularly alternating with panels containing animate motifs in orange, copperous green,blue, rose, light brown, favorite motifs include dragons (usually holding round objectin jaws), mitered or tonsured hybrids, static or running quadrupeds, fish.

Decoration 6: Marginal pen sprays, in red and blue descending diagonally across lowermargins; on versos issuing at left from extension of Psalm-initial, versal, or indepen-dent head of human or beast; on rectos, typically issuing from tail or head at right endof nearest line-filler.

7B11. MusicMake notes on musical notation contained in an item to whatever degree and level is deemed appropri-ate.29 At a minimum, indicate the presence of musical notation or the system of notation employed.Precede this note with the heading Music:. Record information on any texts of music in a contentsnote.

Music: Contains musical notation

Music: Contains alphabetic notation

Music: Contains neumatic notation (Hufnagel)

Music: Contains staff notation (4 line)

7B12. Binding30

Describe the binding of an item to whatever degree and level is deemed appropriate. At a minimum,give notice of whether the binding is contemporary with the item, later, or modern. Assign a generaldate to the binding if possible. If known, identify the binder(s) responsible for the binding of a manu-script. Precede this note with the heading Binding:.

Binding: Modern

Binding: 20th cent. Parchment wrapper

Binding: 17th cent., early. Three-quarter calf, gold tooled

29. For an introduction to music in the Middle Ages, see Theodore Karp, “Medieval Music in Perspective,” in James MPowell, ed., Medieval Studies: An Introduction, 401–31.30. For an introduction, see Graham Pollard, “Describing Medieval Bookbindings,” in Medieval Learning and Literature:

Essays Presented to Richard William Hunt, ed. J.J.G. Alexander and M.T. Gibson (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1976), 50–65. Forfuller treatment, see Léon Gilissen, La Reliure occidentale antérieure à 1400, Bibliologia: elementa ad librorum studiapertinentia, 1 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1983); J.A. Szirmai, The Archaeology of Medieval Bookbinding (Aldershot, Hants.:Ashgate, 1999).

67

Note Area

Binding: 15th cent. Original sewing on five slit, tawed straps laced into woodenboards. Endband cords laid in grooves. Covered with white, tawed skin, blind-tooled with a St. Andrew’s cross within panel borders. The covering leather issewn around the endbands, from spine to edges, with a back-stitch. Traces ofround bosses, probably brass, and of two straps and pin fastenings, the pins onthe upper board.

[Shailor, Beinecke Library, I:37]

7B13. Accompanying materialsMake notes on any materials attached to or accompanying an item, particularly in the case of letters orlegal documents which may have, or have had, seals attached.31 When giving dimensions of seals,measure the impression left by the seal matrix. Precede this note with the heading Accompanying Mate-rials:.

Accompanying materials: With 1 seal (green, oval, 2.1 x 3.2 cm.), on a tag, bearing afleur-de-lys and the legend: “S. JOHANNIS LE ABE”

Accompanying materials: With 1 seal (red, 2.5 cm. diam.), applied, bearing a stag

Accompanying materials: With 3 tags for seals (missing)

7B14. OriginMake notes on the origin of an item, including date, place, agency and reason for production as accu-rately as can be determined. Indicate basis for localization, dating, and identification, or give referenceto other notes that may contain such information. Transcribe in full any colophon or other statementregarding date, place, agency, and reason for production of an item. If such a statement is alreadytranscribed as part of a contents note, do not repeat it separately here. Give the precise folio or pagereference where information is found. If known, identify the patron, donor, or recipient of a manu-script. Precede this note with the heading Origin:.

Origin: Written in northern France, probably first half of 13th cent. See notes onscript.

Origin: Written in Paris in 1370 by Iohannes de Papeleu. “Anno Domini millesimotrecentesimo septimo decimo, hoc opus transcriptum est a Iohanne de Papeleu, clericoParisius commoranti in vico Scriptorum, quem velit servare Deus qui est retributoromnium bonorum in secula seculorum. Amen.” (fol. 506r)


31. As guides to the description of seals, see Hilary Jenkinson, Guide to Seals in the Public Records Office, 2nd ed. (London:H.M.S.O., 1968); Pierre Chaplais, English Royal Documents: King John–Henry IV, 1199–1461 (Oxford: Clarendon Press,1971); Michel Pastoreau, Les Sceaux, Typologie des sources du Moyen Âge occidental, 36 (Turnout: Brepols, 1981); P. D. A.Harvey and Andrew McGuinness, A Guide to British Medieval Seals (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1996).


68

Origin: Produced in Paris in 1318 by Thomas de Maubeuge for Pierre Honnorez duNeuf Chastel. “[rubr.] Ci commencent les chroniques des roys de France … lesquellesPierres Honnorez du Nuef Chastel en Normandie fist escrire et ordener en la maniereque elles sont, selonc l’ordenance des croniques de Saint Denis, a mestre Thomas deMaubeuge, demorant en rue nueve Nostre Dame de Paris, l’an de grace NostreSeigneur MCCCXVIII.” (fol. 2r)

[M.A and R.H. Rouse, “The Book Trade at the University of Paris, ca. 1250–ca. 1350” in Authentic

Witnesses, 279]

7B15. ProvenanceMake notes on the history of ownership of an item. Note all marks of ownership such as bookplates,ex libris and ex dono inscriptions, armorial bindings, etc., as well as other physical or textual evidencethat contribute to establishing provenance. Provide references to sales catalogs, inventories, or otherdocumentation as available.

Inscription and date on fol. i recto: “En Vsu et scriptura 1573.” Inscription insidefront cover, in hand of 16th-cent. (visible under ultraviolet light): “Dono possideo | GSelb DX [?]”. Signature of “Jac. Roch” with date “20 Aprilis 1793” on fol. 1r; laterinscription “Bought of Mr. Roche of Cork,” probably identifiable as James Roche,1770–1853; DNB, v. 17, p. 69. Belonged to Sir Thomas Phillipps (no. 3899; stampand notation inside front cover; tag on spine). From the library of George Dunn ofWoolley Hall near Maidenhead (1865–1912, booklabel and inscription “dbl/ G D. |May 1903” inside front cover; his sale at Sotheby’s, 2 Feb. 1914, no. 1573). Two uni-dentified entries from sales catalog pasted inside front cover and on first flyleaf. Be-longed to Henry Fletcher.

[Shailor, Beinecke Library, I:288–89]

7B16. Immediate source of acquisitionRecord the immediate source from which an item passed into the collection of the current holdinginstitution. Make notes on the circumstances and date of acquisition, indicating whether the item wasacquired through purchase, gift, transfer, deposit, loan, etc. Provide references to sales catalogs, acces-sion records, and other documentation as needed. This information may be withheld from publicaccess if desired.

Gift of Mrs. Henry Fletcher, 1953

Purchased from H.P. Kraus, 1949, April 23

69

Note Area

7B17. Former and related shelfmarks32

Record any shelfmark, pressmark, or other inventory mark that may have been assigned to an item inthe past. Also record any past or present related shelfmark, as in the case when an item has beendismembered and its parts have been assigned separate designations in the same or other collections.Give any discussion of former or related shelfmarks in a note on provenance. Precede this note witheither the heading Former shelfmark: or Related shelfmark:.

Former shelfmark: Bury St. Edmunds, MS S.155(now London, British Library, MS Cotton Tib. B.ii)

Former shelfmark: Phillipps MS 21975(now New York, Pierpont Morgan Library, MS 652)

Related shelfmark: Oxford, Bodleian Library, MS. Hatton 115(related to a single dismembered leaf, now Lawrence, KS, Kenneth Spenser ResearchLibrary, Pryce MS C2:2)

7B18. BynamesRecord the byname of an item—that is, the popular name or names by which an item is or has beenfamiliarly known, other than by the title of the work it contains or by its shelfmark.33 If a manuscriptpossesses a popular name, this byname or one of its bynames will also usually be the uniform title forthe manuscript (see AACR2R 25.13). Precede this note with the heading Byname:.

Byname: Ellesmere Chaucer

Byname: Medici Vergil

Byname: Parker Chronicles and Laws

Byname: Vienna Dioscurides

Byname: Manesse codex; Grosse Heidelberger Liederhandschrift; ManessischeHandschrift; …

7B19. Current shelfmarkRecord the current shelfmark of an item using the standard form of scholarly citation. The cita-

32. On medieval shelfmarks and library catalogs, see Richard Sharpe, “Accession, Classification, Location: Shelfmarks inMedieval Libraries,” Scriptorium 50 (1996): 279–87; N.R. Ker, Medieval Libraries of Great Britain, 2nd ed., (London: Royal Histori-cal Society, 1964); and Albert Derolez, Les Catalogues de bibliothèques, Typlogie des sources du Moyen Âge occidental, 31(Turnhout: Brepols, 1979).33. See Wilma Fitzgerald, Ocelli nominum: Names and Shelf Marks of Famous/Familiar Manuscripts, Subsidia mediaevalia, 19

(Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Medieval Studies, 1992).


70

tion of a shelfmark normally consists of four main elements: the geographical location of therepository, the name of the repository itself, an abbreviated form of the designation manuscript(usually MS, or Ms, or ms., or Hs., or Cod., etc.) and the repository designation for the manu-script. The citation of a shelfmark must reproduce exactly any abbreviation, punctuation, use ofupper and lower case letters, and any other features used by the holding institution to identifythe item. The scholarly form of a shelfmark citation is distinct from the same shelfmark formu-lated as a uniform title (see Appendix A3.1.2 and AACR2R 25.13). Precede this note with theheading Shelfmark:.

Shelfmark: Oxford, Bodleian Library, MS. Douce 217

Shelfmark: Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France, ms. fr. 10135

Shelfmark: Vienna, Österreichische Nationalbibliothek, Hs. 2564

Shelfmark: New York, Pierpont Morgan Library. MS M.1

Shelfmark: Munich, Bayerische Staatsbibliothek, Cod. Gall. 4

7B20. Reference to published descriptions or citationsGive precise references to the most authoritative and comprehensive published descriptions or stan-dard citations for an item. Provide references constructed according to Peter M. Van Wingen, StandardCitation Forms for Rare Book Cataloging, 2nd ed. (Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress, CatalogingDistribution Service, 1996), xvi–xxvii. Give as many references as necessary, listing the most current,authoritative, and comprehensive items first.Ù�Ú Û�Ú Ü Ý�Þ<ß�àOápâ�ãAä-á:åIæ8ç�å èé ã>êUëiå,ìHíCá

(Washington, D.C., Library of Congress, Ms. BS75 1335)

Schutzner, S. Med. and Ren. bks. in LC, I, 6Svato Schutzner, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscript Books in the Library of Congress: ADescriptive Catalog, 2 vols. (Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress, 1989–)

De Ricci, p. 180, no. 1Seymour de Ricci, Census of Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the United States andCanada, 3 vols. (New York: H.W. Wilson, 1935–40)

Fay & Bond, p. 117, no. 1C.U. Faye, Supplement to the Census of Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in theUnited States and Canada, ed. W.H. Bond (New York: Bibliographical Society ofAmerica, 1962)

7B21. Reference to published editions, facsimiles, or treatmentsGive precise references to the most authoritative and comprehensive published text editions, facsimile

71

Note Area

reproductions, monographic studies, or articles on an item. References may be to the work or to thephysical item or to both. Provide references constructed according to 7B20. Give as many references asnecessary, listing the most current, authoritative, and comprehensive items first.

PL, 103, cols. 485–554Patrologiae cursus completus, series latina, ed. J.-P. Migne, 221 vols. (Paris, 1844–64)

Hunter Blair, P. Moore Bede. Early English mss in facsimile, 9Peter Hunter Blair, The Moore Bede: An Eighth-Century Manuscript of the VenerableBede’s Historia ecclesiastica gentis Anglorum in Cambridge University Library (Kk.5.16), EarlyEnglish Manuscripts in Facsimile, 9 (Copenhagen: Rosenkilde and Bagger, 1959)

Hamburger, J.F. Rothschild canticlesJeffrey F. Hamburger, The Rothschild Canticles: Art and Mysticism in Flanders and theRhineland circa 1300 (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1990)

7B22. Additional physical formIf desired, provide information on any reproductions, transcriptions, or other additional physical orelectronic formats in which an original item may exist, either for use at the holding institution, throughremote access, or in published form. Include notes on the extent to which an original item or thework(s) it contains is reproduced.

Also available in microfilm: for use in library only

Also available in CD ROM (illuminations only)

Also available in digital format: accessible through library website

Partial transcription of text (paper: 20th cent.): for use in library only

7B23. Form of reproductionRecord information describing an item that is a reproduction of an original (e.g., microfilm) whencataloging from a reproduction and when information in the bibliographic record represents the origi-nal. Indicate the type, place, agency, date, physical description, series statement, publication, and extentof the reproduction (when not complete) as applicable. Include a statement of reproduction in everycatalog record associated with a reproduced item being described (i.e., in both the host item and ana-lytic records when applicable).

Microfilm. Vatican City : Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, 1958. 1 microfilm reel ; 35 mm.

Microfiche. Binghamton, N.Y. : Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1994– . 1microfiche; (Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts in Microfiche Facsimile, ASM 1.1 ; Medieval& Renaissance Texts & Studies, 136–37)


72

7B24. Restrictions on accessIf desired, record any special circumstance affecting access to material, such as restrictions of gift orbequest, special permissions required, restricted locality for use, or fragile condition. State whether it ispreferable that a substitute physical form of the item be consulted in place of the original, such as aprinted facsimile or a microform or digital reproduction.

Access limited: Use of reproduction preferred

Access restricted: Apply to curator of manuscripts

Available for consultation in East Reading Room only

7B25. Terms governing use and reproductionIf desired, record conditions governing use and reproduction of material once access hasbeen obtained. Indicate limitations on use of content of material and conditions affectingreproduction.

Apply for permission to publish

Reproduction limited by copyright

Digital images protected by copyright

7B26. Location of originals / reproductionsIf desired, record the name and location of the repository with custody over originals or reproductionsof an item or items being described.

OriginalBiblioteca Apostolica Vaticana; Vatican City

ReproductionMicrofilm Knights of Columbus Vatican Film Library, Pius XII Memorial Library,

Saint Louis University; 3650 Lindell Boulevard, St. Louis, MO 63108; USA;314-977-3090

7B27. Cataloging historyRecord here details concerning the origin of the content of an item description. At a minimum,indicate whether an item description is the product of original cataloging from an item in handor from a reproduction, or whether an item description is provided from a previously exist-ing item description (printed or handwritten), and indicate the date of an item description.Indicate revisions or additions to an item description following any earlier cataloging his-tory. If desired, also record the name of the individual responsible for the content of anitem description.

73

Note Area

Item cataloged in hand by [name of cataloger], [date]

Item cataloged from microform reproduction by [name of cataloger], [date]

Item cataloged from existing description: [reference to published or unpublished description]

Item cataloged in hand by [name of cataloger], [date]; revised by [name of cataloger],[date]; decoration description provided by [name of cataloger], [date] …


74

75


� � � � ��

8 �This area is not used for manuscripts.


76

77

Appendix A: Added Entry Access

� � � � ��

ContentsA1. General ruleA2. Specific rules

A2.1. Two or more persons or corporate bodies involvedA2.2. Analytical added entriesA2.3. Title added entry access

A3. Added entries required in the catalog recordA3.1. Added entries required in a summary descriptionA3.1.1. Place of productionA3.1.2. Uniform title of the manuscript

A3.2. Added entries required in a detailed descriptionA3.2.1. Secundo folioA3.2.2. Names associated with production and ownership�

1 �� Follow the general rules as provided in AACR2R 21.29.�

2 ��! "�#�$��%��&Follow the specific rules as provided in AACR2R 21.30, with the following additions or modificationsgiven below.

A2.1. Two or more persons or corporate bodies involvedIf two or more persons or corporate bodies are involved in the creation, translation, or editing of awork, or in the production of an item, make added entries under the headings for all persons or corpo-rate bodies involved not given as the main entry. In cases where large numbers of persons or corporatebodies are involved, make added entries for as many persons or corporate bodies as practicable or thatare deemed significant.

A2.2. Analytical added entriesIf two or more works contained in an item being cataloged are not given separate analysis, make ana-


78

lytical added entries under the appropriate title or author-title headings for all significant authors andtitles of works (as determined by the cataloger) not given as the main entry.

A2.3. Title added entry accessTitle added entry access may be desirable in certain instances when access through variations or per-mutations of the title proper, alternate title, parallel title, or other title information will better facilitatethe retrieval of an item. Titles given to works in manuscript can be highly variable from one copy toanother and, thus, be unpredictable, thereby diminishing the value of the transcribed title both asa means of direct access and as a device for collocation of multiple copies. More frequently it will bethrough the uniform title of the work or the manuscript (see Appendix A3.1.2) that access will besought. However, within families of manuscripts or among certain common works there may be adegree of commonality in the titles that will make increased title access desirable. A normalized orclassicized form of orthographic irregularities might also facilitate increased access.

Make title added entries for variations of the title proper that are deemed significant and useful forincreased access. The recommendations below should be applied at the discretion of the cataloger asappropriate to the item in hand.

General provisionMake an added entry for the title proper as it has been transcribed, omitting only aninitial article as required. If the title proper is lengthy, make a shortened added entrythat ends at the first logical point after the fifth word. Make added entries for signifi-cant variations of the title proper, such as might appear in colophons, running titles,spine titles, cover titles, etc.

0F5. Variantly and erroneously spelled wordsMake an added entry for the title proper using corrected and normalized spelling ofwords variantly or erroneously spelled, declined, or conjugated. In the case of Latintexts, provide classical spellings. In the case of vernacular texts, provide the normal-ized contemporary spellings (i.e., do not modernize the spelling of a pre-modern ver-nacular languages, such as rendering an Old French text in modern French spelling).

0F6. Missing letters and illegible textMake an added entry for a title supplying missing letters and illegible text withoutsign of editorial intervention.

0F7. Manuscript correctionsIf manuscript corrections have been incorporated as part of a title, make an addedentry for the title in its uncorrected state, if desired.

0F8. AbbreviationsMake an added entry for a title expanding fully all abbreviations without sign of

79


editorial intervention. Unless considered necessary, do not make an added entry for atitle preserving the abbreviations in an unexpanded form.

1B1. Title proper

1B1.4. Items lacking a collective titleMake added entries for titles other than the first transcribed as part of a collectivetitle proper.

7B4. Variations of title and statement of responsibility

'3 ( '*)+)-, ).,�/�0%1�2!,�3415,�6-7�2815, )92!/:0%;<,>=@?�0�?�A"B-CD15,�=�B�1E)

The following added entries required in the catalog record define only a minimum set of added entriesfor each level of description. Added entry access may be selectively augmented according to localcataloging policies. For instance, an institution choosing to create summary descriptions for itsholdings may also desire to provide added entry access for former shelfmarks, such as is normallygiven in a detailed description. In all cases, information is supplied on the basis of its availabilityand applicability.

A3.1. Added entries required in a summary descriptionA summary description requires at least the added entries listed below to be included in the catalogrecord, if the information is available and applicable.

A3.1.1. Place of production (4C, 7B14)Make a hierarchical added entry for the place of production of an item, giving the country, signifi-cant area subdivisions, and specific place. Use modern established forms for place-names andgeo-political boundaries. If these names or boundaries have changed since the date of creation ofan item, give the modern established forms for both the place-names and the original and mod-ern boundaries.

France – Normandy – Rouen

Belgium – Flanders – Ghent

Italy – Rome

Spain – Catalonia

A3.1.2. Uniform title of the manuscriptMake an added entry for the uniform title of a manuscript as a physical entity, following the provisionsof AACR2R 25.13 and the related Library of Congress Rule Interpretation.


80

Manuscripts usually possess two uniform titles, one for the work contained in the manuscript and onefor the manuscript itself as a physical entity. While a manuscript as a physical entity will have only asingle uniform title, the source for this title will either be the byname or popular name of the manu-script, if such a name exists, and in which case there may be multiple such names (see 7B18), or theshelfmark of the manuscript. An authority structure should exist or be created to resolve all cross-references. Regardless of whether an original manuscript or its reproduction is being cataloged, mainentry access is given through the work.

For the manuscript copy of the Canterbury Tales by Geoffrey Chaucer popularly known as theEllesmere Chaucer and housed in the Huntington Library in San Marino, California, as MSEL 26 C 9:FHGJILKNMJKPORQ!SUTVKEWXMYQ

: Chaucer, Geoffrey, d. 1400Z KXI\[#]�Q8_O IaO bcM: Canterbury talesd S�KXGe�M

: Ellesmere ChaucerfXg Mhbi[c^jGJQlk: San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS EL 26 C 9m WXW�MnWoMpKqOrQ!SsTVK5WXMYQtT"KXIi[l]uQv_O IaO\bcM

: Ellesmere Chaucer

Only in the case of a work that exists in a unique manuscript copy will the uniform title for the workand the manuscript as a physical entity be the same.

For the anonymous Mixtec manuscript showing in picture and hieroglyph the succession andgenealogy of kings in pre-Conquest southern Mexico popularly known variously as the CodexNuttall or Codex Zouche or Codex Zouche-Nuttall and housed in the British Library in Lon-don as MS Additional 39671:FHGJILKNMJKPOrQ!SsTVK%WXMwQxT"KPI\[!]"Qv_O I!O\byM

: Codex Nuttalld S�KXGe�M: Codex Nuttal, Codex Zouche, Codex Zouche-NuttallfXg Mhbi[cjGJQlk

: London, British Library, MS Additional 39671

For manuscripts of sacred scripture or liturgical works an abbreviated form of the uniform title of themanuscript as a physical entity (either the byname or the shelfmark) is recorded as an addition to theuniform title for the work (see AACR2R 25.18A12 and 25.22B).FHGJIiK$MpKPORQ!SUTVKEWXMYQ

: Catholic ChurchZ KXI\[#]�Q8^_O`IaO`bcM: Book of hours (Ms. De Brailes)d S�KXGe�M

: William de Brailes hours; De Brailes hoursfXg Mhbi[cjGJQlk: London, British Library, MS Additional 49999m WXW�MnWoMpKqOrQ!SsTVK5WXMYQtT"KXI\[8]"Qw_O IaO\bcM

: De Brailes hoursFHGJIiK$MpKPORQ!SUTVKEWXMYQ: Catholic ChurchZ KXI\[#]�Q8^_O`IaO`bcM

: Book of hours (Ms. Honnold Library. Crispin 20)fXg Mhbi[cjGJQlk: Claremont, CA, Honnold Library, MS Crispin 20

81


zU{X{�|n{N|p}P~r�!�*�"}%{X|Y�<�"}X�\�8�"�v��~`�!~\�y|: Honnold Library for the Associated Colleges.

Manuscript. Crispin 20�H� �i}$|p}P~R�!�U�V}E{X|Y�: Catholic Church�x}X�\�#��8�_~`�a~`�c|

: Psalter (Ms. Blanche of Castile)�%��} � ��|: St. Louis and Blanche of Castile psalter; Blanche of Castile psalter; Royalpsalter�X� |h�i�c� � �l�

: Paris, Bibliothèque de l’Arsenal, ms. 1186zU{X{�|n{o|p}%~r�!�s�"}%{X|Y�t�"}X�i�l�"�w�_~ �a~\�c|: Blanche of Castile psalter�H� �i}$|p}P~r�!�U�"}%{X|Y�t�"}X�\�!�"�p��~r�y~\�y|

: Haggadah (Ms. Rylands)�%��} � ��|: Rylands haggadah, Rylands Spanish haggadah, Ryland Sephardi haggadah�X� |h�i�c� � �l�

: Manchester, John Rylands Library, MS Heb. 6zU{X{�|n{o|p}%~r�8�U�V}%{�|Y�t�"}X�i�l�"�w��~r�y~i�R|: Rylands haggadah�� R}�|�}+~a�w��}-{E|J��}��r�h� �w��~c�v~`�!|

: Bible. N.T. Revelation. Latin. Trinityapocalypse�%��} � ��|: Trinity apocalypse; Trinity College apocalypse�X� |h�i�c� � �l�

: Cambridge, Trinity College, MS 950 (R.16.2)zU{X{�|n{o|p}%~r�!�s�"}%{X|Y�t�"}X�\�8�"�w�_~ �a~\�c|: Trinity apocalypse

Formulate a shelfmark as a uniform title according to AACR2R 25.13B1c. Do not repeat terms such as“manuscript,” “codex,” etc. or their abbreviations as part of the repository designation, unless theseterms constitute essential or integral elements of the repository designation. A shelfmark is formu-lated differently in the notes (see 7B19) from the shelfmark as a uniform title. When applicable,include the foliation or pagination for the leaves occupied by the work being described.

Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. Manuscript. BA 29

British Library. Manuscript. Cotton Otho A. XII

Biblioteca apostolica vaticana. Manuscript. Vat. lat. 679

Corpus Christi College (University of Cambridge). Library. Manuscript. 173, fol. 1r–56r

A3.2. Added entries required in a detailed descriptionA detailed description requires at least the added entries listed below, in addition to those listed inA3.1, to be included in the catalog record, if the information is available and applicable.

A3.2.1. Secundo folio (7B6)Make an added entry for the secundo folio reference of a literary, legal, medical, scientific work, etc.,but not for letters, legal documents, or archival records, owned in the Middle Ages by a corporate body.Identify this added entry with the designation “Secundo folio” followed by a colon.


82

A3.2.2. Names associated with production and ownership (7B14–15)Make added entries for all persons, families, or corporate bodies associated with the production andownership of an item.

83

Appendix B: Analysis

APPENDIX B: ANALYSISContents

B1. AnalysisB2. Linking entries required in the catalog recordB3. Distribution of elements between host item and analytic catalog records

�1 ��

Separate analysis of constituent works contained in a manuscript codex or in a composite manuscriptcodex is required for detailed descriptions when applicable. Create catalog records for a compositemanuscript codex using an analytic structure (see AACR2R 13.5) consisting of a host item record forthe codex itself and multiple analytic constituent records for individually analyzed works. Do not giveseparate analysis for the constituent parts of standard works whose contents vary within a defined setof texts (e.g., the Bible or liturgical and devotional works) or for compiled works (e.g., collections ofsermons, hymns, letters, laws and statutes, charter, writs, and other legal documents, etc.), unless thisis deemed desirable. Separate analysis for constituent works in a composite manuscript codex is notrequired when providing only a summary description, but it may be used if desired.

A manuscript codex or composite manuscript codex containing multiple works that were originallyproduced as a unit or later bound together do not require the addition of a “Bound with” note in eitherthe host item or constituent works record. This information is indicated either through the contentsnote (which in all cases is required to be complete) or through a host item linking entry (see below).

�2 �� !��"�# $�&%'(�� $�*)+��,�.-/�#01�*�*��324�5 $�"0 2� �)

If an analytic structure is used to describe a host item and its constituent works, provide a host itemlinking entry in each of the analytic records for the constituent works to indicate the subordinaterelationship of the analytic records to their host item. If desired, constituent unit linking entries mayalso be provided in the host item record to indicate the reciprocal relationship of the host item to itsanalytic records. However, constituent unit linking entries may not be used as a substitute for thecontents note in the host item record.

�3 �#65�7�8� !��9&'(��72��:2�;<�"�"�*=>�*��!�<91�?�$@��*�*�A-�2.�8�B��=C�(�D)��.��.�E!��F0G01��&�.�32�� $�"012� $).�

Distribute descriptive information, added entries, and subject analysis between host item and analyticcatalog records according to the policies of the cataloging institution. A basic set of descriptive ele-ments is required and common to all records (host item and analytic) regardless of level of description


84

(see 0D). However, the principal that should guide the distribution of notes, added entries, and sub-ject analysis between host item and analytic records is the appropriateness of this information andthese access points to the host item as a whole or to the individual constituent work. The result is thatsome information is normally provided only in the host item record (e.g., Statement of Collation);some information is duplicated in both the host item record and its analytic constituent records (e.g.,Form of Reproduction); some categories of information are repeated in both the host item record andits analytic constituent records, but contain synoptic information appropriate to the whole in one andspecific information appropriate to the constituent work in the other (e.g., Contents); and some infor-mation is normally provided only in the analytic constituent record (e.g., Host Item Linking Entry).Particular circumstances, however, may affect the normal distribution of information, placing infor-mation normally provided in the host item record instead in the analytic constituent record (e.g., Scriptor Decoration particular to an individual work meriting separate treatment).

Elements normally HJI�K�KLIEM to host item and analytic records:

1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITYTitle properGeneral material designation (optional)Parallel titleOther title informationFirst and subsequent statements of responsibility

2. EDITION/VERSIONStatement of edition / versionStatement of responsibility relating to edition / version

4. PLACE AND DATE OF PRODUCTION5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION

ExtentOther physical detailsDimensions

7. NOTES7B1. Format, nature, and scope7B2. Language7B3. Source of title and statement of responsibility7B4. Variations of title and statement of responsibility7B5. Contents7B17. Former and related shelfmarks7B19. Current shelfmark7B20. Reference to published descriptions or citations7B21. Reference to published editions, facsimiles, or treatments7B23. Form of reproduction7B27. Cataloging history

85

Appendix B: Analysis

Elements normally found NPO?Q R in host item record:

7. NOTES7B6. Secundo folio7B7. Statement of collation7B8. Layout7B9. Script7B10. Decoration7B11. Music7B12. Binding7B14. Origin7B15. Provenance7B16. Immediate source of acquisition7B18. Bynames7B24. Restrictions on access7B25. Terms governing use and reproduction

Elements normally found SET"U V in analytic record:

Subject analysisAPPENDIX B. ANALYSIS

B2. Host item linking entry

Genre/form analysisAPPENDIX A. ADDED ENTRY ACCESS

POINTSA3.2.2. Secundo folioA3.2.3. Names associated with production and

ownershipAPPENDIX B. ANALYSIS

B2. Constituent unit linking entries

APPENDIX A. ADDED ENTRY ACCESS POINTSA3.1.1. Place of productionA3.1.2. Uniform title of the manuscript


86

87

Appendix C: MARC 21 Coding Summary and Examples

� � � � �

� � � � �

� � � � �

� �� 21 �� ! "$#

The following list of MARC 21 leaders, control fields, and tags represents only those most commonlyused or those that are required in constructing an AMREMM catalog record. It does not define thecomplete set of leaders, control fields, and tags that may be used.

Leader / Control Field / Tag Codes / Elements / Notes / Added EntriesLeader 06 (type of record) t (manuscript language material)Leader 07 (bibliographic level) a (monographic component part)

c (collection)m (monograph/item)

Leader 08 (type of control) – (Do not use code “a” for archival control. AMREMMprovides bibliographical control over manuscriptmaterials)

Leader 17 (encoding level) – (full level: summary and detailed levels of descriptioncorrespond to full-level cataloging, regardless ofwhether an original or reproduction is used as thebasis for the description)

1 (full level, material not examined: use when an itemis cataloged exclusively from a previously existingmanuscript description)

Leader 18 (descriptive cataloging form) a (AACR2)Control field 007/00 (category of material) c (computer file)

h (microform)Control field 008/06 (type of date) i (inclusive dates of a collection: e.g., 1420–1500)

k (range of years of bulk collection: e.g., 1430–1460)q (questionable date: e.g., 1415?–1460, between 11––

and 12––, between 11––? and 12––?, between 1100and 1125, between 1125 and 1150, etc.)


88

s (single known date/probable date: e.g., 1215, 1215?,ca. 1349, ca. 1349?, 112–, 112–?, 11––, 11––?)

Control field 008/15–17 (place of production) e.g., fr, enkControl field 008/18–21 (illustrations) – (no illustrations)

a (illustrations)p (illuminations)

Control field 008/35–37 (language) e.g., lat, eng, etc.040 ‡e amremm041 e.g., englat1xx main entry heading240 uniform title245 title and statement of responsibility246 ‡i [fol. ref.]: ‡a variations of title246 ‡i Secundo folio: ‡a secundo folio250 edition / version260 ‡a place of production260 ‡c date of production300 ‡a extent300 ‡b support300 ‡b decoration300 ‡c dimensions300 ‡e accompanying materials500 format (see below nature and scope)500 source of title and statement of responsibility500‡a Collation: statement of collation500‡a Layout: layout500‡a Script: script500‡a Decoration: decoration500‡a Binding: binding500‡a Accompanying materials: accompanying materials500‡a Origin: origin500‡a Former shelfmark: former shelfmark500‡a Related shelfmark: related shelfmark500‡a Byname: byname500‡a Shelfmark: current shelfmark505 contents506 restrictions on access510 reference to published descriptions or citations520 nature and scope (see above format)530 additional physical form533 form of reproduction535 location of originals/reproductions

89


540 terms governing use and reproduction541 immediate source of acquisition546 language561 provenance581 reference to published editions, facsimiles, or treatments583 ‡z cataloging history6xx subject headings as applicable655 form/genre headings as applicable7xx added entry headings as applicable700 name of agency of production—individual700 ‡e former owner former owner—individual700 ‡e scribe scribe700 ‡e corrector corrector700 ‡e artist artist700 ‡e illuminator illuminator700 ‡e rubricator rubricator700 ‡e binder binder700 ‡e donor donor700 ‡e patron patron710 or 730 uniform title of manuscript710 name of agency of production—corporate body710 ‡e former owner former owner—corporate body730 or 710 uniform title of manuscript740 added entry—uncontrolled related/analytical title as

applicable752 place of production773 host item linking entry774 constituent unit linking entry776 additional physical form

%�& '�( 21(�)�* +-,/.�021�&3%54768079

1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA

1A2.2245:10: ‡a P[ublii] Vergilii Mar[onis] Bucolicorum liber.

245:10: ‡a Speculum iudiciale / ‡c a Magistro Guillelmo Duranti compositum.

245:10: ‡a Commentariorum C[aii] Iulii Caesaris de bello Gallico liber ‡c / IuliusCelsus Constantinus quintus consul emendavit.

245:10: ‡a Marcrobii Theodosii viri illustrissimi Saturnalium liber.


90

245:00: ‡a Modus quomodo parliamentum regis Anglie et Anglorum suorumtenebatur.

245:00: ‡a Vita et passio S[ancte] Thome Cantuariensis Archiepiscopi et Martyris.

245:10: ‡a Liber ethicorum / ‡c compilatus a Fratre Alberto Theutonico de OrdineFratrum Predicatorum.

245:10: ‡a Politicorum Aristotelis liber.

245:10: ‡a Sancti Ambrosii Episcopi De officiis ministrorum.

245:10: ‡a Pour se que pluisours gens desirent asavoir la nature des faucons.

245:13: ‡a La nature des faucons.

245:10: ‡a Des faucons.

245:10: ‡a Des oysiaus.

245:10: ‡a [Traité de la fauconnerie].

1B1.1245:13: ‡a Le rommant de la rose.

245:10: ‡a Hystoria Brittonum.

245:10: ‡a Actas de las cortes de Madrid año 1393.

245:10: ‡a Regula Sancti Benedicti.

245:10: ‡a Petri Lombardi Sententiarum IV.

245:10: ‡a Sermo Beati Augustini Episcopi de nativitate Domini.

245:10: ‡a Commentarii et expositione Georgii Trapezuntii in aphorismis libri fruc-tus Ptolomei.

245:10: ‡a Periphyseon, id est, De divisione naturae.

245:10: ‡a Liber physicorum, sive, Auditus physici.

91


245:10: ‡a Consulta Beati Basilii, que dicuntur, Regula eiusdem.

1B1.2245:10: ‡a [Questiones disputate Sancti Thome]

1B1.4245:10: ‡a Carta foreste … [etc.].

245:10: ‡a Epistole Ivonis Carnotensis Episcopi … [etc.].

1B1.5245:10: ‡a Scriptum Ethicorum Aristotelis / ‡c secundum Thomam de Aquino. Super

libro Rhetoricorum Aristotelis / editum a Fratre Egidio de Roma.

245:10: ‡a Aurelii Augustini Doctoris De sermone Domini in monte ; ‡b SanctiAugustini In epistolam Sancti Iohannis Apostoli. Sancti Ambrosii EpiscopiDe officiis ministrorum.

245:10: ‡a Hystoria evangelium. ‡b Hystoria actuum apostolorum … [etc.].

1B1.6245:10: ‡a [De consolatione philosphiae].

245:10: ‡a [Historia regum Britanniae].

245:00: ‡a [Bestiary].

245:00: ‡a [Herbal].

110:2–: ‡a Catholic Church.240:10: ‡a Book of hours (Ms. National Art Library. MSL/1902/1654)245:10: ‡a [Book of hours : ‡b use of Rouen].710:2–: ‡a National Art Library (Great Britain). ‡k Manuscript. ‡n MSL/1902/1654.

110:2–: ‡a Catholic Church.240:10: ‡a Psalter (Ms. Library of Congress. BX2033.A2 1200z)245:10: ‡a [Psalter].710:2–: ‡a Library of Congress. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n BX2033.A2 1200z.

110:2–: ‡a Catholic Church.240:10: ‡a Psalter (Ms. Utrecht)


92

245:10: ‡a [Psalter].730:0–: ‡a Utrecht psalter.

130:0–: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts of the Apostles. ‡l Coptic. ‡s Pierpont MorganLibrary. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n G.67

245:10: ‡a [Acts of the Apostles].710:2–: ‡a Pierpont Morgan Library. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n. G.67.

130:0–: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Revelation. ‡l Latin. ‡s British Library. ‡k Manuscript.‡n Royal 19 B. xv.

245:10: ‡a [Apocalypse].710:2–: ‡a British Library. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n. Royal 19 B. xv.

130:0–: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Psalms. ‡l Latin. ‡s Houghton Library. ‡k Manuscript.‡n MS Typ 260.

245:10: ‡a [Psalms : ‡b with Glossa ordinaria].730:02: ‡a Glossa ordinaria.710:2–: ‡a Houghton Library. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n MS Typ 260.

100:0–: ‡a Gilbert, ‡c de La Porrée, Bishop, ‡d ca. 1075–1154.245:10: ‡a [Commentarius in Psalmos].730:02: ‡a Bible. ‡N.T. ‡p Psalms. ‡l Latin. ‡s Houghton Library. ‡k Manuscript.

‡n fMS Typ 29.710:2–: ‡a Houghton Library. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n fMS Typ 29.

245:00: ‡a [Treatises on rhetoric].

245:00: ‡a [Arthurian romances].

245:00: ‡a [Florilegium].

245:00: ‡a [Medical formulary].

245:00: ‡a [Sermons].

110:1–: ‡a Great Britain.240:10: ‡a Laws, etc.245:10: ‡a [Commonplace book of legal precedents].

110:1–: ‡a Great Britain.240:10: ‡a Laws, etc. (Year books : 5–7 Edward III)245:10: ‡a [Year books : ‡b 5–7 Edward III].

93


110:1–: ‡a Great Britain.240:10: ‡a Laws, etc. (Statuta nova : 1 Edward III – 23 Henry VI)245:10: ‡a [Statuta nova : ‡b 1 Edward III – 23 Henry VI].

1B2.2245:10: ‡a [Letter, 1533 Sept. 26, Waltham Abbey to Arthur Plantagenet, Lord Lisle,

Calais].

245:10: ‡a [Letter, 1454(?) Feb. 1, Norwich to John Paston I].

245:10: ‡a [Letters, 1452–1510].

245:10: ‡a [Letters, 1555–1635 (bulk 1590–1610)].

1B2.3245:10: ‡a [Grant, 1325 June 26, of land in Hooke (Dorset) to John de

Barkingdon].

245:10: ‡a [Lease, 1586 June 10, of the manor of White Waltham (Berks.) to Tho-mas Grove].

245:10: ‡a [Quitclaim, 1290 June 27, of rights in the manor of Washfield (Devon) toHenry le Abbe].

245:10: ‡a [Marriage settlement, 1665 April 20, between Alice Meredith Croft andJohn Maende].

245:00: ‡a [Writs, 1356–1642].

245:00: ‡a [Manor rolls, 1282–1419 (bulk 1350–1419)].

245:10: ‡a [Cartulary, 955–1316].

245:00: ‡a [Register of writs, 1285–1415].

245:10: ‡a [Mercantile records, 1476-1502 (bulk 1495–1502)].

1E1245:10: ‡a Regula Beati Francisci : ‡b confirmata a domino Pape Honorio.

245:10: ‡a Officium Beate Marie Virginis : ‡b secundum consuetudinem Romanecurie.


94

245:14: ‡a The inventarye of all the goodes and chattells of John Edolf, late of NewRomnye, gent., deceased : ‡b taken and priced the xx. daie of Septemb[e]r1576 in the xviii. yere of the raigne of o[u]r soveraign ladye Quene Elisabeth.

245:12: ‡a L’ordre [et] police gardez en l’institution de l’Appotiquairerye, College [et]Chapelle de la Charité Chrestienne : ‡b pour les pauvres honteux, prestres,escoliers, gentilzhommes, marchans [et] artisans de la ville [et] faulxbourgsde Paris, detenus en extremite de maladie/‡c de l’invention de Nicolas Houël,Parisien.

1E2245:10: ‡a Propheta magnus surrexit : ‡b [sermon on Luke XIV, 10].

1F1245:10: ‡a Legenda aurea / ‡c de Iocabo de Voragine.

245:10: ‡a Marci Catonis vita / ‡c per Leonardum Arretinum e Plutarcho in Latinumtraducta.

245:13: ‡a Le livre des proprietes des choses / ‡c translate de Latin en Francois l’anmil trois cens sexante et douze par le commandement du Roy Charles lequint de son nom regnant en France noblement et puissaument en cetemps.

245:10: ‡a Cassiodori Senatoris De institutionibus divinarum litterarum.

245:10: ‡a Additiones domini Prioris Petri super Regula Sancti Salvatoris.

245:10: ‡a Liber … historie gentis Anglorum.

1F2245:10: ‡a Rationale divinorum officiorum / ‡c [Wilelmus Durhant].

1F4245:10: ‡a Della nobilita civile / ‡c de M. Girolamo Osorio ; Portoghese tradotta in

lingua Italiana de Bernado Trivigiano.

1F5245:10: ‡a Liber dyalogorum Beati Gregorii Pape Doctoris.

245:10: ‡a Anicii Manlii Severini Boetii viri illustris et consularis ordinarii patriciiLiber de consolatione philosophie.

95


245:10: ‡a De regimine principum / ‡c editus a Fratre Egidio Romano OrdinisFratrum Heremitarum Sancti Augustini.

245:13: ‡a La controversie de noblesse plaidoyee entre Publius Cornelius Scipion dunepart et Gaius Flaminius de aultre part/‡c laquelle a este faicte et composee parun notable docteur en loix et grant orateur nomme Surse de Pistoye’.

2 :<;>=@?BAC?EDGF�HJI ;LK<MN?ODGFQP K<;2P2B2

250:––: ‡a Versio ultima.

4 R<S7T2UWVYXZU3[]\ \3U7_ Xba�c SLdea�\ f@V<_ gEaG[hU diX7U4C1

260:––: ‡a [Spain]

260:––: ‡a [France]

260:––: ‡a [Brittany]

260:––: ‡a [Osnabrück]

260:––: ‡a Paris.

4C2260:––: ‡a [England?]

260:––: ‡a [Siena?]

4D1260:––: ‡c [1399]

260:––: ‡c [1271]

260:––: ‡c [1455]

260:––: ‡c 1474.

4D2260:––: ‡c [1215?]


96

260:––: ‡c [ca. 1350]

260:––: ‡c [ca. 1350?]

260:––: ‡c [1415?–1460]

260:––: ‡c [112–]

260:––: ‡c [112–?]

260:––: ‡c [11––]

260:––: ‡c [11––?]

260:––: ‡c [between 11–– and 12––]

260:––: ‡c [between 11––? and 12––?]

260:––: ‡c [between 1100 and 1125]

260:––: ‡c [between 1125 and 1150]

260:––: ‡c [between 1100 and 1150]

260:––: ‡c [between 1125 and 1175]

260:––: ‡c [between 1150 and 1199]

260:––: ‡c [between 1150 and 1175]

260:––: ‡c [between 1175 and 1199]

260:––: ‡c [between 1175 and 1225]

5 j<k7lbm<n�o�p�qCrbs t7n$pvuwoxkzyCoE{G|hq`uit7q5B2

300:––: ‡a 1 leaf.

300:––: ‡a 1 bifolium.

300:––: ‡a 125 leaves.

97


300:––: ‡a 2 sheets.

300:––: ‡a 1 roll (5 sheets)

300:––: ‡a 1 roll (8 membranes)

300:––: ‡a 1 item.

5B3300:––: ‡a leaves 5r–30v.

300:––: ‡a leaves 1r–26v, 26r [bis]

300:––: ‡a p. 10–15.

5B4300:––: ‡a 2 v. (200, 150 leaves)

300:––: ‡a 3 rolls (8, 5, 10 sheets)

5B5300:––: ‡a 83 items.

5C1300:––: ‡a 20 leaves : ‡b parchment.

300:––: ‡a 15 leaves : ‡b paper.

300:––: ‡a 7 leaves : ‡b papyrus.

300:––: ‡a 1 sheet : ‡ parchment.

300:––: ‡a 1 roll (10 sheets) : ‡b parchment.

300:––: ‡a 1 roll (5 sheets) : ‡b paper.

300:––: ‡a 1 roll : ‡b papyrus.

5C2300:––: ‡a 93 leaves : ‡b parchment, ill.

300:––: ‡a 60 leaves : ‡b parchment, ill., 2 maps.


98

5D1300:––: ‡a 60 leaves : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 254 x 171 (209 x 121) mm. bound to 259 x

176 mm.

300:––: ‡a 95 leaves : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 236–246 x 176 (190 x 132) mm. bound to253 x 183 mm.

5D2300:––: ‡a 10 leaves : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 200 x 150 (160) mm. bound to 210 x 160 mm.

5D3300:––: ‡a 1 sheet : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 230 x 380 mm.

5D4300:––: ‡a 1 roll (10 sheets) : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 3000 x 300 mm.

300:––: ‡a 1 roll (4 sheets) : ‡b paper ; ‡c 1200 x 300 mm.

5E1300:––: ‡a 1 sheet : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 160 x 300 mm. + ‡e 2 seals.

7 }z~��3�`��`�<�2�7B1.1

500:––: ‡a Ms.500:––: ‡a Mss.

500:––: ‡a Ms. fragment.500:––: ‡a Ms. fragments.

500:––: ‡a Ms. leaf.500:––: ‡a Ms. leaves.

500:––: ‡a Ms. gathering.500:––: ‡a Ms. gatherings.

500:––: ‡a Ms. component part.

500:––: ‡a Ms. codex.

500:––: ‡a Ms. composite codex.

99


500:––: ‡a Ms. document.500:––: ‡a Ms. documents.

500:––: ‡a Ms. roll.500:––: ‡a Ms. rolls.

7B1.2520:––: ‡a Bible arranged in usual order with common set of prologues (see Ker,

Medieval Manuscripts in British Libraries, I: 96–97).

520:––: ‡a Text of the Psalms with the Ordinary Gloss.

520:––: ‡a Text heavily annotated by a 16th cent. hand.

520:––: ‡a Collection of 132 documents (1580–1710) pertaining to property hold-ings of the Hale family in Hertfordshire, Cambridgeshire, Bedfordshire,Berkshire, and London. The manors of King’s Walden (Herts.), WhiteWaltham (Berks.), and Edworth (Beds.) are particularly well docu-mented.

520:––: ‡a See printed catalog for full description.

7B2546:––: ‡a Latin.

546:––: ‡a Old French.

546:––: ‡a Latin, with interlinear gloss in Old English.

546:––: ‡a Latin and Old French.

7B3500:––: ‡a Title from rubric (fol. 2v).

500:––: ‡a Title from colophon (fol. 80r).

500:––: ‡a Title from spine, 17th cent.

500:––: ‡a Title added at head of text, 15th cent. (fol. 1r).

500:––: ‡a Title from printed catalog.


100

500:––: ‡a Title supplied by cataloger.

7B4246:0–: ‡i Running title (passim): ‡a Consulta Basilii

246:0–: ‡i Title in prologue (fol. 1r): ‡a Regula Beati Basilii episcopi

246:0–: ‡i Title in explicit (fol. 93v): ‡a Consulta Basilii que dicuntur regula eiusdem

7B5.2505:0–: ‡a Fol. 1r–4r: “[rubr.] Incipit regula sancti Augustini episcopi. [text] Ante

omnia fratres karissimi diligatur Deus, deinde proximus … orans ut sibidebitum dimittatur et in temptationem non inducatur. [rubr.] Explicit regulasancti Augustini.”

505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. 1r–33v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologus beati Iheronimi presbyteri in primumlibrum de vitis et doctrinis sanctorum patrum. [text] Benedictus Deus quivult omnes homines salvos fieri … ; [fol. 2r: rubr.] Incipit liber primus devitis et doctrinis sanctorum patrum editus ab Iheronimo. De sancto Iohanneabbate capitulum primum. [text] Primum igitur tamquam verum fundamentumnostri operis … et tanta nobis ostendit mirabilia ipsi gloria in secula seculorum.Amen. [rubr.] Explicit primus vitaspatrum.” [PL 21:387–462].

505:8–: ‡a 2. fol. 33v–62v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologus in librum secundum. [text] Veremundum quis dubitet meritis stare sanctorum … ; [fol. 34r: rubr.] Incipitliber secundus de verbis et doctrinis sanctorum patrum. [text] Quidamsanctorum seniorum patrum interrogantibus se monachis de causa abstineredixit … quia interiori homini nostro sanitas inde crescit. [rubr.] Explicit libersecundus.” [PL 73:739–810] …

505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. 1r: blank.505:8–: ‡a 2. fol. 1v–149v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologus venerabilis Bede presbiteri. [text]

Gloriosissimo regi Ceolvulfo Beda famulus christi et prespiter. Hystoriamgentis anglorum ecclesiasticam quam … ; [fol. 4r: rubr.] Britania oceani in-sula. [text] Cui quondam Albion nomen erat … letentur insule multe etconfiteantur memorie sanctitatis eius. [rubr.] Explicit liber .v. hystorie gentisAnglorum.”

7B5.3505:0–: ‡a Fol. 1r–612v: Bible in usual order (see Ker, Medieval Manuscripts in British

Libraries I:96–97), prologues cited precede text: General Prologue [Stegmüller284]; Prologue to Pentateuch [Stegmüller 285], Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus,Numbers, Deuteronomy; Joshua [Stegmüller 311]; Judges; Ruth; 1 Kings[Stegmüller 323] …

101


505:0–: ‡a Fol. 1r–344v, Old Testament. fol. 1r–3r: “[rubr.] Incipit epistola beatiIeronimi ad Paulinum presbiterum de omnibus divinis historiis libris.”[Stegmüller 284]; fol. 3r: “[rubr.] Alius prologus.” [Stegmüller 285]; fol. 3r–18r: Genesis; fol. 18v–31r: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Exodi.” fol. 31r–39v: “[rubr.]Incipit liber Levitici.” fol. 39v–51v: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Numeri.” fol. 51v-62r: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Deuteronomii.” fol. 62r+v: “[rubr.] Incipit prologussuper librum Iosue.” [Stegmüller 311]; fol. 62v–70r: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Iosue.”fol. 70r–77v: “[rubr.] Hic incipit liber Iudicum.” fol. 77v–78v: “[rubr.] Incipitliber Ruth.” fol. 78v–79r: “[rubr.] Prologus.” [in Reg.; Stegmüller 323]; fol.79r–90r: “[rubr.] Incipit liber Regum primus.” …

505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. 1r–12v: Calendar including the feasts of Herculanus (1 March),Zenobius (25 May, in red), Proculus (1 June), Laurentinus and Pergentinus(3 June), Alexander bishop (6 June), Romulus (6 July), Nabor and Felix (12July), Anne (26 July), “Sancte Marie ad nives” (5 August, in red), Transfigu-ration (6 August, in red), Donatus (7 August), Concordia (13 August), Potitus(6 September), Salvius (10 September), Reparata (8 October, in red),Cerbonius (10 October), “Fidriani” [sic, for Frediano; 18 November],Florentinus bishop (30 December).

505:8–: ‡a 2. fol. 13r–111v: “[rubr.] Incipit offitium beate Marie virginis secundumconsuetudinem romane curie.”

505:8–: ‡a 3. fol. 112r–176v: Office of the Dead. fol. 177r+v ruled but blank.505:8–: ‡a 4. fol. 178r–214r: Long Hours of the Cross. fol. 214v–215v ruled but

blank.505:8–: ‡a 5. fol. 216r–221r: Short Hours of the Cross. fol. 221v ruled but blank.505:8–: ‡a 6. fol. 222r–239r: Penitential psalms.505:8–: ‡a 7. fol. 239r–252r: Litany, including Zenobius. fol. 252v ruled but blank.

505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. 1r–6v: Sarum calendar in purple, red, and black, partly graded. Addedobit of “Thomas Minstrecha miles,” A.D. 1452, at 19 Nov.

505:8–: ‡a 2. fol. 7v–12v: Table of statutes and chapters.505:8–: ‡a 3. fol. 13r: “[rubr.] Magna carta. [text] Edwardus dei gracia … T. Edwardo

filio nostro apud Westm’ xi [sic] die Octobris anno regni nostri xxv. Dat’ permanum nostram apud Westm’ xxviii die Marcii anno regni nostri xxix [sic].”[SR I:116].

505:8–: ‡a 4. fol. 20r: “[rubr.] Incipit sentencia eiusdem carta.” [SR I:6].505:8–: ‡a 5. fol. 21r: “[rubr.] Incipit carta de foresta.” Confirmation of 12 [sic] Oct.

1297 [SR I:120].505:8–: ‡a 6. fol. 24v: “[rubr.] Incipiunt provisiones de Merton.” [SR I:1].505:8–: ‡a 7. fol. 28v: “[rubr.] Incipit Statutum de Marlebergh.” [SR I:19].505:8–: ‡a 8. fol. 39r: “[rubr.] Incipit Statutum Westm’ primi.” In French. [SR I:26].505:8–: ‡a 9. fol. 58r: “[rubr.] Incipit Statutum Gloucestr’.” In French. [SR I:45].505:8–: ‡a 10. fol. 63r: “[rubr.] Incipiunt explanaciones eiusdem.” [SR I:50] …


102

7B5.4505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. 1r–93v: Regula / Saint Basil, Bishop of Caesarea.505:8–: ‡a 2. fol. 94r–160v: De institutis coenobiorum et de octo principalium vitiorum

remediis libri XII / John Cassian.505:8–: ‡a 3. fol. 161r–211v: Regula / Saint Benedict, Abbot of Monte Cassino.505:8–: ‡a 4. fol. 211v–259v: Liber de praecepto et dispensatione / Saint Bernard of

Clairvaux.505:8–: ‡a 5. fol. 259v–268v: Praeceptum / Saint Augustine, Bishop of Hippo.

7B6246:1–: ‡i Secundo folio: ‡a Desiderium flagrans

246:1–: ‡i Secundo folio [text]: ‡a Tempus predicte246:1–: ‡i Secundo folio [commentary]: ‡a Cum accessissent

246:1–: ‡i Secundo folio [calendar, fol. 3r]: ‡a KL Marcius246:1–: ‡i Secundo folio [text, fol. 9r]: ‡a In exitu hii

7B7.1500:––: ‡a Collation: Parchment, fol. ii (paper: Briquet, Armoiries, 1656) + 66 + ii

(paper: Briquet, Armoiries, 1656) ; 1–106118(–2, 6) ; quires signed i-xi.

500:––: ‡a Collation: Parchment, fol. iii (modern paper) + ii (medieval parch-ment, ruled but blank) + 248 + ii (medieval parchment, ruled but blank)+ iii (modern paper) ; 12 28(–1, fol. 1, with loss of text) 3–1010 1110(–4,fol. 92, without loss of text) 12–2610 272 ; horizontal catchwords in redink frames.

7B8500:––: ‡a Layout: Written in 25 long lines; frame-ruled.

500:––: ‡a Layout: Written in 2 columns of 35 lines, above line; ruled.

500:––: ‡a Layout: Written in 2 columns of 30 lines; frame-ruled in ink with doubleinner and outer vertical bounding lines; prickings in outer margin.

500:––: ‡a Layout: Written in 2 columns, below top line, 20 lines for text, 40 lines forcommentary. Text ruled in lead on alternate lines in inner column; continu-ous commentary ruled in dry point in outer column.

7B9500:––: ‡a Script: Written in a chancery hand.

103


500:––: ‡a Script: Written in medium grade, gothic book script (littera minusculagothica textualis libraria).

500:––: ‡a Script: Written in insular phase II half-uncial, with interlinear Old En-glish gloss in Anglo-Saxon pointed minuscule.

500:––: ‡a Script: Written by 3 scribes in an early Anglicana book script(Anglicana formata). Scribe 1, fol. 1r–75v; scribe 2, fol. 75v–140r; scribe3, fol. 140r–210v.

7B10500:––: ‡a Decoration: Illuminated initials and ten miniatures.

500:––: ‡a Decoration: Historiated initials at head of each chapter.

500:––: ‡a Decoration: Pen-flourished initials throughout.

500:––: ‡a Decoration: Primary (5- to 6-line) and secondary (2- to 3-line) pen-flour-ished initials throughout.

500:––: ‡a Decoration: Historiated initials (8-line) at head of each chapter (fols. 1r,25r, 61v, 80r).

500:––: ‡a Decoration 1: Calendar illustrations: fol. ir, Jan. ( Janus Feasting / Aquarius);fol. ivr, Feb. (Unshod man by fire holding boot / Pisces) …

500:––: ‡a Decoration 2: Historiated initials, major Psalm divisions: fol. 7r, Ps. I, B(King David playing harp in upper compartment / David beheading Goliathin lower compartment); fol. 49r, Ps. 38, D (David kneeling and pointing toeyes before enthroned Christ) …

500:––: ‡a Decoration 3: Decorated illuminated initials: (a) 4-line gold “KL” in calen-dar on bi-partite rose and blue ground patterned in white; (b) 2-line Psalminitials, other than major divisions, alternately in rose and blue, simply pat-terned in white, on rectangular grounds of opposite color, in-filled withfoliate- or dragon-rinceau, some incorporating head of human or beast, bird,quadruped, or hybrid, with bird or quadruped perched atop some initials.

500:––: ‡a Decoration 4: Flourished initials: (a) Psalm versal, set off: gold and bluealternately, flourished in blue and red respectively; Dominical letters “A” incalendar: blue, flourished in red.

500:––: ‡a Decoration 5: Line-fillers: Red, gold, and blue stylized foliate or geomet-ric patterns, regularly alternating with panels containing animate motifs inorange, copperous green, blue, rose, light brown, favorite motifs include drag-ons (usually holding round object in jaws), mitered or tonsured hybrids, staticor running quadrupeds, fish.


104

500:––: ‡a Decoration 6: Marginal pen sprays, in red and blue descending diagonallyacross lower margins; on versos issuing at left from extension of Psalm-ini-tial, versal, or independent head of human or beast; on rectos, typically issu-ing from tail or head at right end of nearest line-filler.

7B11500:––: ‡a Music: Contains musical notation.

500:––: ‡a Music: Contains alphabetic notation.

500:––: ‡a Music: Contains neumatic notation (Hufnagel).

500:––: ‡a Music: Contains staff notation (4 line).

7B12500:––: ‡a Binding: Modern.

500:––: ‡a Binding: 20th cent. Parchment wrapper.

500:––: ‡a Binding: 17th cent., early. Three-quarter calf, gold tooled.

500:––: ‡a Binding: 15th cent. Original sewing on five slit, tawed straps laced intowooden boards. Endband cords laid in grooves. Covered with white, tawedskin, blind-tooled with a St. Andrew’s cross within panel borders. The cov-ering leather is sewn around the endbands, from spine to edges, with a back-stitch. Traces of round bosses, probably brass, and of two straps and pinfastenings, the pins on the upper board.

7B13500:––: ‡a Accompanying materials: With 1 seal (green, oval, 2.1 x 3.2 cm.), pendant

on a tag, bearing a fleur-de-lys and the legend: “S JOHANNIS LE ABE.”

500:––: ‡a Accompanying materials: With 1 seal (red, 2.5 cm. diam.), applied, bear-ing a stag.

500:––: ‡a Accompanying materials: With 3 tags for seals (missing)

7B14500:––: ‡a Origin: Written in northern France, probably first half of the 13th-cent.

See notes on script.

500:––: ‡a Origin: Written in Paris in 1370 by Iohannes de Papeleu. “Anno Dominimillesimo trecentesimo septimo decimo, hoc opus transcriptum est a Iohanne

105


de Papeleu, clerico Parisius commoranti in vico Scriptorum, quem velit servareDeus qui est retributor omnium bonorum in secula seculorum. Amen.” (fol.506).

500:––: ‡a Origin: Produced in Paris in 1318 by Thomas de Maubeuge for PierreHonnorez du Neuf Chastel. “[rubr.] Ci commencent les chroniques des roys deFrance … lesquelles Pierres Honnorez du Nuef Chastel en Normandie fist escrireet ordener en la maniere que elles sont, selonc l’ordenance des croniques de SaintDenis, a mestre Thomas de Maubeuge, demorant en rue nueve Nostre Dame deParis, l’an de grace Nostre Seigneur MCCCXVIII.” (fol. 2r).

7B15561:––: ‡a Inscription and date on fol. i recto: “En Vsu et scriptura 1573.” Inscription

inside front cover, in hand of 16th-cent. (visible under ultraviolet light): “Donopossideo | G Selb DX [?]”. Signature of “Jac. Roch” with date “20 Aprilis1793” on fol. 1r; later inscription “Bought of Mr. Roche of Cork,” probablyidentifiable as James Roche, 1770–1853; DNB, v. 17, p. 69. Belonged to SirThomas Phillipps (no. 3899; stamp and notation inside front cover; tag onspine). From the library of George Dunn of Woolley Hall near Maidenhead(1865–1912, booklabel and inscription “dbl/ G D. | May 1903” inside frontcover; his sale at Sotheby’s, 2 Feb. 1914, no. 1573). Two unidentified entriesfrom sales catalog pasted inside front cover and on first flyleaf. Belonged toHenry Fletcher.

7B16541:––: ‡a Gift of Mrs. Henry Fletcher, 1953.

541:––: ‡a Purchased from H.P. Kraus, 1949, April 23.

7B17500:––: ‡a Former shelfmark: Bury St. Edmunds, MS S.155.

500:––: ‡a Former shelfmark: Phillipps MS 21975.

500:––: ‡a Related shelfmark: Oxford, Bodleian Library, MS. Hatton 115.

7B18500:––: ‡a Byname: Ellesmere Chaucer.

500:––: ‡a Byname: Medici Vergil.

500:––: ‡a Byname: Parker Chronicles and Laws.


106

500:––: ‡a Byname: Vienna Dioscurides.

500:––: ‡a Byname: Manesse Codex, Manessische Handschrift, HeidelbergerLiederhandschrift, …

7B19500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Oxford, Bodleian Library, MS. Douce 217.

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France, ms. fr. 10135.

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Vienna, Österreichische Nationalbibliothek, Hs. 2564.

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: New York, Pierpont Morgan Library. MS M.1.

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Munich, Bayerische Staatsbibliothek, Cod. Gall. 4.

7B20510:4–: ‡a Schutzner, S. Med. and Ren. bks. in LC, ‡c I, 6

510:4–: ‡a De Ricci, ‡c p. 180, no. 1

510:4–: ‡a Fay & Bond, ‡c p. 117, no. 1

7B21581:––: ‡a PL, 103, cols. 485-554.

581:––: ‡a Hunter Blair, P. Moore Bede. Early English mss in facsimile, 9

581:––: ‡a Hamburger, J.F. Rothschild Canticles.

7B22530:––: ‡a Also available in microfilm: ‡c for use in library only.

530:––: ‡a Also available in CD ROM (illuminations only).

530:––: ‡a Also available in digital format: ‡c accessible through library website.

530:––: ‡a Partial transcription of text (paper: 20th cent.): ‡c for use in library only.

7B23533:––: ‡a Microfilm. ‡b Vatican City : ‡c Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, ‡d 1958.

‡e 1 microfilm reel ; 35 mm.

107


533:––: ‡a Microfiche. ‡b Binghamton, N.Y. : ‡c Medieval & Renaissance Texts &Studies, ‡d 1994–. ‡e 1 microfiche; ‡f (Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts in Mi-crofiche Facsimile, ASM 1.1 ; Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies,136–137).

7B24506:––: ‡a Access limited: Use of reproduction preferred.

506:––: ‡a Access restricted: Apply to curator of manuscripts.

506:––: ‡a Available for consultation in East Reading Room only.

7B25540:––: ‡a Apply for permission to publish.

540:––: ‡a Reproduction limited by copyright.

540:––: ‡a Digital images protected by copyright.

7B26Original535:1–: ‡a Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana; ‡c Vatican City ‡g vc

Reproduction535:2–: ‡3 Microfilm ‡a Knights of Columbus Vatican Film Library, Pius XII Me-

morial Library, Saint Louis University; ‡b 3650 Lindell Boulevard, St. Louis,MO 63108; ‡c USA; ‡d 314-977-3090 ‡gmou

7B27

583:––: ‡z Item cataloged in hand by [name of cataloger], [date]

583:––: ‡z Item cataloged from microform reproduction by [name of cataloger],[date]

583:––: ‡z Item cataloged from existing description: [reference to published or unpub-lished description]

583:––: ‡z Item cataloged in hand by [name of cataloger], [date]; revised by[name of cataloger], [date]; decoration description provided by [nameof cataloger], [date] …


108

�C��7�7�]�C�� G�G�L��8�� $�]�W��Y�7�$�A3.1.1

752:––: ‡a France ‡c Normandy ‡d Rouen.

752:––: ‡a Belgium ‡c Flanders ‡d Ghent.

752:––: ‡a Italy ‡d Rome.

752:––: ‡a Spain ‡c Catalonia.

A3.1.2100:1–: ‡a Chaucer, Geoffrey, ‡d d. 1400.240:10: ‡a Canterbury tales500:––: ‡a Byname: Ellesmere Chaucer.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS EL 26 C 9.730:0–: ‡a Ellesmere Chaucer.

130:0–: ‡a Codex Nuttall.500:––: ‡a Byname: Codex Nuttall, Codex Zouche, Codex Zouche-Nuttall.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: London, British Library, MS Additional 39671.

110:2–: ‡a Catholic Church.240:10: ‡a Book of hours (Ms. De Brailes)500:––: ‡a Byname: William de Brailes hours, De Brailes hours.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: London, British Library, MS Additional 49999.730:0–: ‡a De Brailes hours.

110:2–: ‡a Catholic Church.240:10: ‡a Book of hours (Ms. Honnold Library. Crispin 20)500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Claremont, CA, Honnold Library, MS Crispin 20.710:2–: ‡a Honnold Library for the Associated Colleges. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n

Crispin 20.

110:2–: ‡a Catholic Church.240:10: ‡a Psalter (Ms. Blanche of Castile)500:––: ‡a Byname: St. Louis and Blanche of Castile psalter, Blanche of Castile psalter,

Royal psalter.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Paris, Bibliothèque de l’Arsenal, ms. 1186.730:0–: ‡a Blanche of Castile psalter.

130:0–: ‡a Haggadah (Ms. Rylands)

109


500:––: ‡a Byname: Rylands haggadah, Rylands Spanish haggadah, Ryland Sephardihaggadah.

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Manchester, John Rylands Library, MS Heb. 6.730:0–: ‡a Rylands haggadah.

130:0–: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Revelation. ‡l Latin. ‡s Trinity apocalypse.500:––: ‡a Byname: Trinity apocalypse, Trinity College apocalypse.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Cambridge, Trinity College, MS 950 (R.16.2).730:0–: ‡a Trinity apocalypse.

710:2–: ‡a Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n BA 29.

710:2–: ‡a British Library. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n Cotton Otho A. XII.

710:2–: ‡a Biblioteca apostolica vaticana. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n Vat. lat. 679.

710:2–: ‡a Corpus Christi College (University of Cambridge). ‡b Library. ‡k Manu-script. ‡n 173, fol. 1r–56r.

A3.2.1See 7B6

A3.2.2700:1–: ‡a Du Neuf Chastel, Pierre Honnorez, ‡e former owner.

700:1–: ‡a Roche, James, ‡e former owner.

700:1–: ‡a Phillipps, Thomas, ‡c Sir, ‡d 1792–1872, ‡e former owner.

700:1–: ‡a Dunn, George, ‡e former owner.

700:1–: ‡a Fletcher, Henry, ‡e former owner.


110

111

Appendix D: MARC 21 Cataloging Record Examples

� � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � �

The following examples present summary and detailed descriptions for two types of manuscripts.The first set of examples (I) illustrates catalog records for a manuscript containing two literary works,first given summary description (Ia) and then given detailed description (Ib) with both host-item andanalytic constituent part records. The second example (II) illustrates the catalog record for a legaldocument given detailed description.

� ��! #"San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS HM 34807

Source of Information:Dutschke, Huntington Library, II:704–705 (some modifications made for the purpose of illustration)

Ia. Summary Catalog Record (no analysis of constituent works)

OCLCType: t ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: latBLvl: m Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: Ctry: enk

Cont: GPub: LitF: 0 Index: 0Desc: a Ills: Fest: DtSt: q Dates: 1250, 1299

040:––: ‡e amremm100:0–: ‡a Petrus, ‡c Comestor, ‡d 12th cent.240:10: ‡a Historia scholastica245:10: ‡a Hystoria evangelium. ‡b Hystoria actuum apostolorum … [etc.].260:––: ‡a [England, ‡c between 1250 and 1299]300:––: ‡a 278 leaves : ‡b parchment, ill. ; ‡c 174 x 126 (134 x 95) mm. bound to 184 x 136 mm.500:––: ‡a Ms. codex.


112

520:––: ‡a Old and New and Testament Biblical histories, with genealogical tables from the OldTestament added. See printed catalog for full description.

546:––: ‡a Latin.500:––: ‡a Collective title from closing and opening rubrics (fol. 246r).505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. ir: Old Testament genealogies schematically displayed in an English hand of the end

of the 13th-cent. or early 14th-cent.505:8–: ‡a 2. ff.1r–246r: Historia scholastica / Peter Comestor.505:8–: ‡a 3. fol. 246r–278v: Historia actuum apostolorum / Peter of Poitiers.500:––: ‡a Layout: Written in 2 columns of 40 lines; frame-ruled.500:––: ‡a Script: Written in an English book hand.500:––: ‡a Decoration: Pen-flourished initials in red and blue.500:––: ‡a Binding: Modern, 19th cent.500:––: ‡a Origin: Written in England in the second half of the 13th cent.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS HM 34807.510:4–: ‡a Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Huntington Library, ‡c II:704-705510:4–: ‡a Preston, J. “Medieval Manuscripts at the Huntington: Supplement to De Ricci’s Census,”

Chronica, ‡c vol. 21, 1977, p. 7583:––: ‡z Cataloged from existing description: Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Hunting-

ton Library, ‡c II:704-705.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡v Commentaries ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts. ‡l Latin ‡v Commentaries ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡v Paraphrases ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts. ‡l Latin ‡v Paraphrases ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡x History of Biblical events ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts. ‡l Latin ‡x History of Biblical events ‡v Early works to 1800.650:–0: ‡a Manuscripts, Latin (Medieval and modern) ‡z California ‡z San Marino.650:–0: ‡a Genealogy in the Bible ‡v Tables ‡v Early works to 1800.655:–7: ‡a Gothic scripts. ‡2 aat655:–7: ‡a Textura. ‡2 aat700:02: ‡a Peter, ‡c of Poitiers, ‡d ca. 1130-1205. ‡t Historia actuum apostolorum.710:2–: ‡a Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n HM 34807.752:––: ‡a England.

Ib. Detailed Catalog Record

Host Item Record:

OCLCType: t ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: latBLvl: m Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: Ctry: enk


113


040:––: ‡e amremm100:1–: ‡a Petrus, ‡c Comestor, ‡d 12th cent.240:10: ‡a Historia scholastica245:10: ‡a Hystoria evangelium. ‡b Hystoria actuum apostolorum … [etc.].246:1–: ‡i Secundo folio: ‡a dicunt eum260:––: ‡a [England, ‡c between 1250 and 1299]300:––: ‡a 278 leaves : ‡b parchment, ill. ; ‡c 174 x 126 (134 x 95) mm. bound to 184 x 136 mm.500:––: ‡a Ms. codex.520:––: ‡a Old and New and Testament Biblical histories, with genealogical tables from the Old

Testament added.546:––: ‡a Latin.500:––: ‡a Collective title from closing and opening rubrics (fol. 246r).505:0–: ‡a 1. fol. ir: Old Testament genealogies schematically displayed in an English hand of the end

of the 13th-cent. or early 14th-cent.505:8–: ‡a 2. ff.1r–246r: Historia scholastica / Peter Comestor.505:8–: ‡a 3. fol. 246r–278v: Historia Actuum Apostolorum / Peter of Poitiers.500:––: ‡a Collation: Parchment, fol. i (modern paper) + 278 + i (modern paper); 1–1112 128(–5, 6, 7)

13–1712 186 19–2412 254 (–4); quires 10–15 signed G–M apparently on each (?) leaf in blue;catchword on fol. 137v, in the inner corner, cropped.

500:––: ‡a Layout: Written in 2 columns of 40 lines, some columns divided into 2 narrower columns(e.g., on fol. 98v, 100); frame-ruled in lead; double bounding lines.

500:––: ‡a Script: Written in an English book hand.500:––: ‡a Decoration: Opening initial, 6-line, parted red and blue with filigree infilling around 4 blue

rosettes, with red and blue cascade and flourishing to frame the inner and upper margins.Blue initials, 2-line, with red and blue cascade or red flourishing; initials within the text touchedin red; paragraph marks alternating in red and blue. Running headlines in red and blue.

500:––: ‡a Binding: Modern, 19th cent., in faded green calf.500:––: ‡a Origin: Written in England in the second half of the 13th cent.561:––: ‡a On fol. i verso, written in pale red ink in a mid-16th or 17th cent. legal anglicana script,

probably in explanation of the name “Radulphus” on fol. 278v: “This books appears to havebeen examined by Radulph de Baldock, Deane of Saint Paule 1297.” Ralph de Baldock,bishop of London, 1306-13, and chancellor of England, 1307, owned a number of books:Emden, BRUO, 2147–49, prints the list of the 37 books found in Baldock’s study ( June1313) and of the 126 “libri scholastici” which Baldock bequeathed to St. Paul’s in London,included at item 12 is “Historie scholastice cum aliis scriptis”; however, this book does notappear in St. Paul’s 1458 catalog, printed by W. Dugdale, History of St. Paul’s Cathedral inLondon (London 1716), 60–70. Stegmüller (7091–7092) notes a similar case of the name ofRadulphus, whether possessor or author, added to the end of a Biblical commentary in amanuscript once at St. Paul’s London. The manuscript belonged to Ebenezer Jacob, whosebookplate is on the front pastedown; later owned by John Broadley, with his bookplate on fol.i; his sales, Evans, 12 July 1832 and 19 June 1833 (these catalogs not available to us).

541:––: ‡a Acquired in 1971 from Lathrop C. Harper, Catalog 200 (Spring 1970), n. 9 with a plate offol. 92r.


114

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS HM 34807.510:4–: ‡a Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Huntington Library, ‡c II:704–705510:4–: ‡a Preston, J. “Medieval Manuscripts at the Huntington: Supplement to De Ricci’s Census,”

Chronica, ‡c vol. 21, 1977, p. 7583:––: ‡z Cataloged from existing description: Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Hunting-

ton Library, ‡c II:704–705.650:–0: ‡a Manuscripts, Latin (Medieval and modern) ‡z California ‡z San Marino.650:–0: ‡a Genealogy in the Bible ‡v Tables ‡v Early works to 1800.655:–7: ‡a Bookplates (Provenance) ‡2 rbprov655:–7: ‡a Gothic scripts. ‡2 aat700:1–: ‡a Broadley, John, ‡e former owner.700:1–: ‡a Jacob, Ebenezer, ‡e former owner.700:1–: ‡a Baldock, Ralph de, ‡c Bishop of London, ‡d d. 1313, ‡e former owner.710:2–: ‡a Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n HM 34807.752:––: ‡a England.774:00: ‡7 p0ta ‡a Petrus, Comestor, 12th cent. ‡s Historia scholastica. ‡t Hystoria evangelium, ‡d

England, 1250–1299774:00: ‡7 p0ta ‡a Peter of Poitiers, ca. 1130–1205. ‡s Historia actuum apostolorum. ‡t Hystoria

actuum apostolorum, ‡d England, 1250–1299

Analyzed Constituent Work:

OCLCType: t ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: latBLvl: a Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: Ctry: enk


040:––: ‡e amremm100:0–: ‡a Petrus, ‡c Comestor, ‡d 12th cent.240:10: ‡a Historia scholastica245:10: ‡a Hystoria evangelium.260:––: ‡a [England, ‡c between 1250 and 1299]300:––: ‡a leaves 1r–246r: ‡b parchment ; ‡c 174 x 126 (134 x 95) mm. bound to 184 x 136 mm.500:––: ‡a Ms. component part.520:––: ‡a Old and New and Testament Biblical history by Peter Comestor.546:––: ‡a Latin.500:––: ‡a Title from closing rubric (fol. 246r).505:0–: ‡a Fol. 1r–246r: “[prologue] Reverendo patri et domino Willelmo dei gratia Senonensi

archiepiscopo … Causa suscepti laboris fuit instans petitio sociorum … ; [fol. 1r: text]Imperatorie maiestatis est in palatio [“tres” added in the margin, 14th cent.] habere mansiones… qui prius albula dicebatur, undecimus Silvius Agrippa. [fol. 137r–v, blank; text followsdirectly from fol. 136v to fol. 138r, beginning 4 Reg.:] Porro Ochosias filius Achab regnare

115


cepit in Samaria … de Iohanne filio Symonis prosequentes. [fol. 197v, in the margin, note ofmissing text, 15th cent., being the inset “additiones”; fol. 198r, blank; fol. 198v, beginning theNew Testament:] Mortuo symone qui ultimus v filiorum Mathathie Asamonei dux … etnota differentiam, translatus Enoch subvectus est Helyas, ascendit Ihesus propria sui virtute.[rubr.] Explicit Hystoria Evangelium.”

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS HM 34807.510:4–: ‡a Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Huntington Library, ‡c II:704–705510:4–: ‡a Preston, J. “Medieval Manuscripts at the Huntington: Supplement to De Ricci’s Census,”

Chronica, ‡c vol. 21, 1977, p. 7581:––: ‡a PL 198: cols. 1053–1524C, 1525B–1644.583:––: ‡z Cataloged from existing description: Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Hunting-

ton Library, ‡c II:704–705.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p O.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡v Commentaries ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p O.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡v Paraphrases ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p O.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡x History of Biblical events ‡v Early works to 1800.650:–0: ‡a Manuscripts, Latin (Medieval and modern) ‡z California ‡z San Marino.710:2–: ‡a Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n HM 34807, fol. 1r–

246r.752:––: ‡a England.773:0–: ‡7nntm ‡t Hystoria evangelium. Hystoria actuum apostolorum, ‡d England, 1250–1299

Analyzed Constituent Work:

OCLCType: t ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: latBLvl: a Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: Ctry: enk


040:––: ‡e amremm100:0–: ‡a Peter, ‡c of Poitiers, ‡d ca. 1130–1205.240:10: ‡a Historia actuum apostolorum245:10: ‡a Hystoria actuum apostolorum.260:––: ‡a [England, ‡c between 1250 and 1299]300:––: ‡a leaves 246r–278v : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 174 x 126 (134 x 95) mm. bound to 184 x 136 mm.500:––: ‡a Ms. component part.520:––: ‡a New Testament Biblical history by Peter of Poitiers.546:––: ‡a Latin.500:––: ‡a Title from opening rubric (fol. 246r).505:0–: ‡a Fol. 246r–278v: “[rubr.] Incipiunt capitula Hystorie Actuum Apostolorum. [text] Anno

nonodecimo imperii Tyberii Cesaris adhuc procuratore Iudee Pilato … et in locohonorabili scilicet in cathacumbis. [rubr.] Explicit Hystoria Actum ApostolorumRadulph[i?].”


116

500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: San Marino, CA, Henry E. Huntington Library, MS HM 34807.510:4–: ‡a Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Huntington Library, ‡c II:704–705.510:4–: ‡a Preston, J. “Medieval Manuscripts at the Huntington: Supplement to De Ricci’s Census,”

Chronica, ‡c vol. 21, 1977, p. 7581:––: ‡a PL 198: cols. 1645–1722.581:––: ‡a Stegmüller 6565.581:––: ‡a Stegmüller 6785.583:––: ‡z Cataloged from existing description: Dutschke, C.W. Med. and Ren. mss. in the Hunting-

ton Library, ‡c II:704–705.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Gospels. ‡l Latin ‡v Commentaries ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts. ‡l Latin ‡v Commentaries ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts. ‡l Latin ‡v Paraphrases ‡v Early works to 1800.630:00: ‡a Bible. ‡p N.T. ‡p Acts. ‡l Latin ‡x History of Biblical events ‡v Early works to 1800.650:–0: ‡a Manuscripts, Latin (Medieval and modern) ‡z California ‡z San Marino.710:2–: ‡a Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n HM 34807, fol. 246r–

278v.752:––: ‡a England.773:0–: ‡7nntm ‡t Hystoria evangelium. Hystoria actuum apostolorum, ‡d England, 1250–1299

$%$�&('*)�+-,/.1032/46587():9�;�<=0>)?;@,/AB.�):CED ,F;F,/.G2/+IH )�4J28K-CWashington, D.C., Folger Shakespeare Library, MS X.d.92.

Sources of information:Jean F. Preston and Laetitia Yeandle, English Handwriting, 1400–1650: An Introductory Manual

(Binghamton, N.Y.: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1992), no. 8.Catalog of Manuscripts of the Folger Shakespeare Library, 3 vols. (New York: G.K. Hall, 1971), II:103.

OCLCType: t ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: engBLvl: m Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: Ctry: enk

Cont: GPub: LitF: 0 Index: 0Desc: a Ills: Fest: DtSt: s Dates: 1458

040:––: ‡e amremm110:10: ‡a England. ‡b Sovereign (1483–1485 : Richard III)245:10: ‡a [Warrant, 1485 May 28, to William Catesby to fell and carry wood in the parish of Nuthurst

(Sussex)].300:––: ‡a 1 sheet : ‡b parchment ; ‡c 159 x 213 mm. + ‡e 1 seal.500:––: ‡a Ms. document.520:––: ‡a Warrant under the signet to fell and carry all the wood previously granted to William

Catesby “… as is growing w[i]t[h]in the Grove called the peche conteynyng sex acres in thep[ar]isshe of Nuthurst being now in the holding of oon Davy Tussingh[a]m. whiche

117


he[re]tofor[e] belonged vnto o[u]r Rebell s[ir] william Noreys …” With the king’s sign manualat top: “R[icardus] R[ex].”

546:––: ‡a English.500:––: ‡a Title supplied by cataloger.500:––: ‡a Script: Written in a careful secretary hand.500:––: ‡a Accompanying materials: With 1 seal (fragmentary), applied, signet of Richard III (red, 27

mm.), in a rush ring.500:––: ‡a Origin: “Yeuen vndre oure signet at our[e] Castell of Kenelworth’ the xxviijti Day of May

The secunde yere of oure Reigne.”541:––: ‡a Purchased from Maggs Bros., 1924 September, cat. 454, no. 2115.500:––: ‡a Shelfmark: Washington, D.C., Folger Shakespeare Library, MS. X.d.92.510:4–: ‡a Cat. of mss. of the Folger Shakespeare Library, ‡c II, p. 103510:4–: ‡a De Ricci, ‡c p. 396, no. 1298.1581:––: ‡a Preston & Yeandle. English handwriting, no. 8.583:––: ‡z Item cataloged from existing descriptions.600:00: ‡a Richard ‡b III, ‡c King of England, ‡d 1452–1485 ‡v Autographs.600:00: ‡a Richard ‡b III, ‡c King of England, ‡d 1452–1485.650:–0: ‡a Manuscripts, Medieval ‡z Washington (D.C.)650:–0: ‡a Manuscripts, English ‡z Washington (D.C.)651:–0: ‡a England ‡v Charters, grants, privileges.651:–0: ‡a Sussex (England) ‡v Charters, grants, privileges.651:–0: ‡a Nuthurst Parish (England) ‡v Charters, grants, privileges.655:–7: ‡a Deeds ‡z England ‡z Sussex. ‡2 lcsh655:–7: ‡a Deeds ‡z England ‡z Nuthurst Parish. ‡2 lcsh655:–7: ‡a Warrants (Law) ‡z Great Britain. ‡2 lcsh655:–7: ‡a Seals (Numismatics) ‡z Great Britain. ‡2 lcsh655:–7: ‡a Signet seals ‡z Great Britain. ‡2 local655:–7: ‡a Rush rings. ‡2 local655:–7: ‡a Documentary scripts ‡z Great Britain. ‡2 aat655:–7: ‡a Secretary scripts ‡z Great Britain. ‡2 local700:0–: ‡a Richard ‡b III, ‡c King of England, ‡d 1452–1485.700:1–: ‡a Catesby, William, ‡d d. 1485.700:1–: ‡a Tussingham, David.700:1–: ‡a Norreys, William, ‡c Sir.710:2–: ‡a Folger Shakespeare Library. ‡k Manuscript. ‡n X.d.92.752:––: ‡a England ‡b Sussex ‡c Nuthurst Parish.752:––: ‡a England ‡b Warwickshire ‡d Kenilworth.


118

119

Appendix E: Concordance Between Rules in AACR2R, DCRB, and APPM

� � � � � ��

� � � � � � �

The following concordance provides analogues and parallel and comparative references between rulesin AMREMM and those in AACR2R, DCRB, and APPM. In some cases there is direct one-to-onecorrespondence between these cataloging guides. The references provided here should be interpretedrather as sources (some adopted directly, others modified, and others rejected) that were considered inconstructing the rules for AMREMM.

AMREMM AACR2R DCRB APPM �� !0A 2.0A1, 2.12A, 4.0A1 0A 1.0A0B1 1.0A1, 1.0A2, 1.0H1, 0C1, 0C2, 0C3 1.0B

1.0H2, 1.1A2, 2.0B1,2.13A, 4.0B1

0B1.10B2 2.0B2, 4.0B2 0D 1.0B20C 1.0C1, 2.0C 0E 1.0C0D 1.0D, 1.0D1, 1.0D2, 0B1, Appendix D 1.0D, 1.0D1,

1.0D3, 2.0D 1.0D20E 1.0E1 0F 1.0E0F0F10F2.1 0H, Appendix B0F2.2 2.14E1, LCRI 1.0E 0H, Appendix B0F3 1.0G1 0H 1.0G


120

0F40F5 1.0F1 0G 1.0F0F6 1.0F1 0G 1.0F0F70F8 1.0C1 0J1, 0J2 1.0C"$#&%('�%�)�*,+.-0/21�%3+�%4*657* -8%:9.;=<�*>13?@9A-�1B'DC�'E)F'�%�G.+H<�*F+1A1 1.1A1, 2.1A1, 4.1A1 1A1 1A11A2.1 1.1A2 1A21A2.2 1.1A2, 2.14C 1A2, 1B41A2.3 1.0H1 0C21B1.1 1.1B1, 1.1B2, 1B1, 1B2, 1B3 1.1B1

2.1B1, 4.1B11B1.21B1.31B1.4 1.1G1, 4.1G1 1E1, 1E2 1.1G1B1.5 1.1G2, 1.1G3, 1E1, 1E2 1.1G

1.1G4, 4.1G11B1.6 1.1B7, 2.14A, 4.1B2 1B5 1.1B21B2.1 1.4F1, 1.4F2, 1.4F9, 4D2 1.1B2,1.1B4,

4.1B2, 22.17A 1.1B5, 1.1E11B2.2 4.1B2 1.1B2, 1.1B4,

1.1B5, 1.1E11B2.3 4.1B2 1.1B2,1.1B4,

1.1B5, 1.1E11C 1.1C, 2.1C, 4.1C 1.1C1D1 1.1D3 1C 1.1D11D2 1.1D4 1C 1.1D11E1 1.1E1, 1.1E2, 1.1E3, 1D1, 1D2, 1D3, 1.1E1

1.1E4, 1.1E5, 2.1E1, 1D4, 1D5, 1D62.14D, 4.1E

1E2 1.1E6 1.1E11F1 1.1F1, 1.1F2, 2.1F1, 1G1 1.1F

4.1F1, 4.1F31F2 1.1F1 1G1 1.1F1F3 1.1F3 1G31F4 1.1F6 1G61F5 1.1F7 1G7, 1G81F6 21.4C 7C6

AMREMM AACR2R DCRB APPM

121


IKJML N.O�P�ORQ�SUTWV�L XZY3OMQHS\[HX�LF[2A1 1.2B4, 2.2B3, 4.2A1 2.B5 1.2A1, 1.2B32A2 1.2A1, 2.1A1, 4.2A2 2A1 1.2A22A3 1.2A22B1 1.1B2, 2.2B3, 2B6 1.2B3

2.15B, 4.2A12B2 1.2B1, 2.2B1, 2B1 1.2B1

2.15A, 4.2B12C 1.2C1, 1.2D1, 2.2C1, 2C1 1.2C1

2.2D1, 4.2C1] J _a[�P@L X4OE[�b�Y3c>L�d�O efOgdhNHLZP3[AOib>Y�[HX�L6[3A 1.3A, 2.3A, 4.3A 3 1.3jkJgc b�[�d(L=[.S�NlNm[[email protected] XpQ�NhqrdnP(ORQHS\[HX�LF[4A1 1.44A2 1.4A1, 2.4A1, 4.4A1 4A1 1.44A3 1.4A2, 1.5A3, 1.11, 4A2

LCRI 1.114B1 1.4B1, 1.4C8,

1.4D9, 1.4F94B2 1.4B44B3 1.4B6, 1.4F2 4B94C1 1.4C1, 2.4C1, 2.16B 4B1, 4B10, 4B114C2 1.4C6 4.B124C3 1.4C5, 1.4D5, 1.4F8 4B6, 4B74D1 1.4F1, 2.4F1, 2.16F 4D1, 4D2, 4D34D2 1.4F7, 2.16G 4D5, 4D64D3 1.4F8 4D7, 4D8s JRc�tvuWYBOMd>[�b�NwL>YFd�X4OicmP4ODQHSl[HX�L6[5A1 1.5A1, 2.5A1, 4.5A1 5A1 1.5A15A2 1.5A2 5A25A3 1.5A3, LCRI 1.115B1 1.5B1, 2.5B1, 2.17A1 5B1 1.5B1, 1.5B25B2 2.5B2, 2.5B3, 2.5B4, 5B1, 5B2, 5B3, 1.5B1, 1.5B2

2.5B5, 2.5B6, 2.5B7, 5B4, 5B5, 5B6,2.5B8, 2.5B11, 2.5B12, 5B7, 5B8, 5B10,2.5B13, 2.5B14, 2.5B15, 5B11, 5B12, 5B14,2.5B16, 2.17A1, 4.5B1 5B15



122

5B3 2.5B6 5B65B4 1.5B3, 2.5B17, 2.5B18, 5B16, 5B17, 5B18, 1.5B1, 1.5B2

2.5B19, 2.5B20, 2.5B21, 5B19, 5B20, 5B214.5B2

5B5 4.5B2 1.5B1, 1.5B25C1 1.5C1, 4.5C1 5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 1.5C15C2 1.5C1, 2.5C1, 2.5C2, 5C4, 5C5, 5C6, 5C7 1.5C1

2.5C3, 2.5C4, 2.5C5,2.5C6, 2.5C7, 2.17B1,4.5C2

5D1 1.5D1, 2.5D1, 5D1 1.5D22.17C1, 4.5D1

5D25D3 2.5D4, 2.17C1, 4.5D2 5D5 1.5D25D45E1 1.5E1, 2.5E1 5E1x$y�zW{>|4} {�zm~H|�{F~6A 4.6A 6 1.6� yM��@{.~H|�{F~7A1 1.7A1, 2.7A1, 7B1 1.7A1

2.18A, 4.7A17A2 1.7A2, 2.7A2, 4.7A2 7B27A3 1.7A3 7B37A4 7A7A4.17A4.27B 1.7B, 2.7B, 2.18A, 4.7B 7C 1.7B7B1 1.7B1, 2.7B1, 4.7B1 7C1 1.7B27B1.1 1.7B1, 2.7B1, 4.7B1 7C1 1.7B27B1.2 1.7B1, 2.7B1, 4.7B1 7C1 1.7B27B2 1.7B2, 2.7B2, 4.7B2 7C2 1.7B87B3 1.7B3, 2.7B3, 2.18B1, 7C3 1.7B17

4.7B37B4 1.7B4, 2.7B4, 4.7B4, 7C4, 7C5, 7C6 1.7B17

4.7B57B5.1.1 1.7B18, 2.7B18, 4.7B18 7C16 1.7B2, 1.7B77B5.1.2 1.7B18, 2.7B18, 4.7B18 7C16 1.7B2, 1.7B77B5.2 1.7B18, 2.7B18, 4.7B18 7C16 1.7B2, 1.7B77B5.3 1.7B18, 2.7B18, 4.7B18 7C16 1.7B2, 1.7B7


123


7B5.4 1.7B18, 2.7B18, 4.7B18 7C16 1.7B2, 1.7B77B6 4.7B23 1.7B177B7 2.18D1, 4.7B23 7C9 1.7B177B7.1 2.18D1, 4.7B23 7C9 1.7B177B7.2 2.18D1, 4.7B23 7C9 1.7B177B7.3 2.18D1, 4.7B23 7C9 1.7B177B8 1.7B10, 2.7B10, 7C10 1.7B17

2.18E1, 4.5B17B9 4.7B23 1.7B177B10 1.7B10, 2.7B10, 7C18 1.7B17

2.18F1, 4.7B237B117B12 1.7B10, 2.7B10, 7C18 1.7B17

2.18F1, 4.7B237B13 1.7B11, 2.7B11, 4.7B11 7C117B14 4.7B87B15 4.7B7 7C18 1.7B97B16 4.7B7 1.7B107B177B187B197B20 1.7B15, 2.18C1, 4.7B15 7C14 1.7B147B21 2.18C1, 4.7B9 7C14 1.7B167B22 1.7B16, 2.7B16 1.7B47B23 1.7B57B24 4.7B14 1.7B117B25 4.7B14 1.7B127B26 1.7B67B27�A�� >��A�E�a�A��,�H�,� �l��8�@��.�A�@��A1 21.29 2.2A2 21.30 2.3A2.1 21.30A1 2.3AA2.2 21.30M1 Appendix A 1E1–1E2A2.3 21.30J Appendix A 2.3G

General provision, 0G,0J2, 1B1, 1B3, 1E1–1E2,7C4–7C5

A3A3.1



124

A3.1.1A3.1.2A3.2A3.2.1A3.2.2�A�� >��A�E��H�,�r�(�W B�M B1 13.6AB2B3


125

Appendix F: Manuscript Description and Cataloging Bibliography

� � � � � �

� ��

� � ��

��

Manuscript description and cataloging has traditionally been a highly individualized occupation, and,consequently, practices among catalogers vary depending upon personal style and circumstance. It isnormally an individual cataloger who is responsible for producing the manuscript descriptions thatmake up his or her own catalog, and it is this individual who usually, therefore, also sets the descriptivecriteria for cataloging. For instance, one cataloger may choose to focus upon decoration, another uponscript, and neither may use precisely the same formula to express the collation of a manuscript, thoughthey both agree upon the arrangement of the leaves. National and institutional policies can also affect,or be reflected in, individual practice. Cataloging may be summary or highly detailed depending uponthe scope of a given project. Indeed, the very heterogeneous nature of manuscripts themselves as a classof materials further promotes this diversity. Yet, for all the variety of practice to be found there is alsoa great degree of commonality, at least in the broad categories of description if not always in the man-ner in which their details are expressed.

Beyond establishing a certain desirable degree of uniformity, the present guidelines do not prescribehow the details of a description should be written or the nomenclature that should be used. They setout the broad descriptive categories of information that should be included in a description and howthis information should be disposed in the catalog record. However, the manner in which a manu-script should be analyzed and described is rightly left to the discretion and expertise of the individualcataloger. These guidelines do not in themselves constitute a handbook to manuscript cataloging. Forthis reason, a bibliography is provided for those seeking further information on technical aspects ofmanuscript description and cataloging. It is divided into two sections: analysis, and cataloging anddescription. The first section attempts to set out standard works that are most immediately useful tothe cataloger when analyzing the manuscript as an object, facilitating identification of typology andproper nomenclature for a given item or feature. It is highly selective and works have been chosenbecause they serve either as useful introductions to their respective subjects or as authoritative sources


126

for reference, standard terminology, or bibliography. The result is a mix of works that are both intro-ductory and highly specialized, but it is expected that the reader will be able to identify items throughthe references in these works that will satisfy further inquiry. The second section provides an introduc-tion to cataloging theory and practice, and lays out the sources for what may be understood as theAnglo-American tradition of manuscript cataloging.

�� Introductory• James Douglas Farquhar, “The Manuscript as a Book,” in Sandra Hindman and James Douglas Farquhar,

Pen to Press: Illustrated Manuscripts and Printed Books in the First Century of Printing (College Park, Md.: ArtDepartment, University of Maryland, 1977), 11–99.

• Robert G. Calkins, Illuminated Books of the Middle Ages (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1983).• Otto Pächt, Book Illumination in the Middle Ages: An Introduction, trans. Kay Davenport (London: Harvey

Miller, 1986).• Otto Mazal, Lehrbuch der Handschriftenkunde, Elemente des Buch- und Bibliothekswesens, 10 (Wiesbaden:

Ludwig Reichert Verlag, 1986).• Barbara A. Shailor, The Medieval Book: Illustrated from the Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript Library, Medieval

Academy Reprints for Teaching, 28 (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1991).• L. D. Reynolds and N.G. Wilson, Scribes and Scholars: A Guide to the Transmission of Greek and Latin Literature,

3rd ed. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1991).• Jonathan J.G. Alexander, Medieval Illuminators and their Methods of Work (New Haven: Yale University Press,

1992).• Christopher de Hamel, Scribes and Illuminators (London: British Library; Toronto: University of Toronto

Press, 1992).• Christopher de Hamel, A History of Illuminated Manuscripts, 2nd ed. (London: Phaidon, 1994).• Christopher de Hamel, The British Library Guide to Manuscript Illumination: History and Techniques (London:

British Library; Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2001).

PaleographyGeneral• Joachim Kirchner, Scriptura gothica libraria a saeculo xii usque ad finem medii aevi (Munich: Oldenbourg, 1966).• E. A. Lowe, Handwriting: Our Medieval Legacy (Rome: Edizioni di storia e letteratura, 1969).• S. Harrison Thomson, Latin Bookhands of the Later Middle Ages, 1100–1500 (Cambridge: Cambridge Uni-

versity Press, 1969).• Bernhard Bischoff, Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages, trans. Dáibhí Ó Cróinín and David

Ganz (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990). The standard paleographical manual in English.• Michelle P. Brown, A Guide to Western Historical Scripts from Antiquity to 1600 (Toronto: University of Toronto

Press; London: British Library, 1990).• Jacques Stiennon, Paléographie du Moyen Âge, 2nd ed. (Paris: Armand Colin, 1991).• James J. John, “Latin Paleography,” in Medieval Studies: An Introduction, ed. James M. Powell, 2nd ed. (Syracuse, N.Y.:

Syracuse University Press, 1992): 3–81. An excellent introduction to the subject with extensive bibliography.• Julian Brown, “Aspects of Palaeography,” in A Palaeographer’s View: the Selected Writings of Julian Brown, ed.

127


Janet Bately, Michelle P. Brown, and Jane Roberts (London: Harvey Miller, 1993), 47–91. A posthumousassemblage of earlier essays and a very good introduction to the discipline.

• M.B. Parkes, Pause and Effect: An Introduction to the History of Punctuation in the West (Berkeley: University ofCalifornia Press, 1993).

Great Britain• Charles Johnson and Hilary Jenkinson, English Court Hand A.D. 1066 to 1500, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon

Press, 1915).• Hilary Jenkinson, The Later Court Hands in England from the Fifteenth to the Seventeenth Century, 2 vols. (Cam-

bridge: Cambridge University Press, 1927; rpt. New York: Ungar, 1969).• T.A.M. Bishop, Scriptores regis: Facsimiles to Identify and Illustrate the Hands of Royal Scribes in Original Charters

of Henry I, Stephen, and Henry II (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1961).• L.C. Hector, The Handwriting of English Documents, 2nd ed. (London: Edward Arnold, 1966).• Giles E. Dawson and Laetitia Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, 1500–1650: A Manual, rev. ed.

(New York: Norton, 1968).• M.B. Parkes, English Cursive Book Hands, 1250–1500 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1969).• T.A.M. Bishop, English Caroline Minuscule (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1971).• N.R. Ker, English Manuscripts in the Century after the Norman Conquest (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1960).• Anthony G. Petti, English Literary Hands from Chaucer to Dryden (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University

Press, 1977).• Jean F. Preston and Laetitia Yeandle, English Handwriting, 1400–1650: An Introductory Manual (Binghamton,

N.Y.: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1992).

France• Maurice Prou, Manuel de paléographie latine et française, 4th ed. (Paris: Picard, 1924).• Emmanuel Poulle, Paléographie des écritures cursives en France du XVe au XVIIe siècle (Geneva: Droz, 1966).• Gabriel Audisio and Isabelle Bonnot-Rambaud, Lire le français d’hier: Manuel de paléographie moderne, XVe-

XVIIIe siècle (Paris: Armand Colin, 1991).

Italy/Renaissance• B.L. Ullman, The Origin and Development of Humanistic Script (Rome: Edizione di Storia e Letteratura, 1960).• Alfred Fairbank and Berthold Wolpe, Renaissance Handwriting: An Anthology of Italic Scripts (London: Faber

and Faber, 1960).• James Wardrop, The Script of Humanism: Some Aspects of Humanist Script, 1460–1560 (Oxford: Clarendon

Press, 1963).• Vincenzo Federici, La scrittura delle cancellarie Italiane dal secoli XII al XVII (Rome: Pompeo Sansaini, 1934).• E.A. Loew, The Beneventan Script: A History of the South Italian Minuscule, ed. Virginia Brown, 2nd ed., 2 vols.,

Sussidi Eruditi, 33–34 (Rome: Edizioni di Storia e Letteratura, 1980).

Spain• Jesús Muñoz y Rivero, Manual de paleografia diplomatica española de los siglos XII al XVII: Método téorico-práctico

para aprender a leer los documentos españoles de los siglos XII al XVII, 2nd ed. (Madrid: Vidua de Hernando, 1889;rpt. Madrid: Atlas, 1970).


128

• Jesús Muñoz y Rivero, Paleografía visigoda: Método teórico-práctico para aprender a leer los codices y documentosespañoles de los siglos V al XII (Madrid: Daniel Jorro, 1919).

• Zacarias García Villada, Paleografía española: Precedida de una introducción sobre la paleografía latina (Madrid:Revista de filologia española, 1923; rpt. Barcelona: Ediciones El Albir, 1974.)

• Antonio Cristino Floriano Cumbreño, Curso general de paleografía y diplomatica españolas, 2 vols. (Oviedo:Imprenta la Cruz, 1946).

• Augustín Millares Carlo and José Manuel Ruiz Asencio, Tratado de paleografía española, 3rd ed., 3 vols. (Madrid:Espasa-Calpe, 1983).

Codicology• L. M. J. Delaissé, “Towards a History of the Medieval Book,” Codicologica 1: Théories et principes, Litterae

textuales (Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1976), 75–83.• Jean Vezin, “La Réalisation matérielle des manuscrits latins pendant le haut Moyen Âge,” Codicologica, 2:

Eléments pour une codicologie comparée, Litterae textuales (Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1978), 15–51.• Albert Derolez, Codicologie des manuscrits en écriture humanistique sur parchemin, 2 vols., Bibliologia: Elementa

ad librorum studia pertinentia, 5–6 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1984).• Jacques Lemaire, Introduction à la codicologie, Publications de l’Institut d’études médiévales, Université

catholique de Louvain, textes, études, congrès, 9 (Louvain-la-Neuve: Université catholique de Louvain,1989).

• Albert Derolez, “La Codicologie et les études médiévales,” in Bilan et perspectives des études médiévales en Eu-rope: Actes du premier Congrès européen d’études médiévales (Spoleto, 27–29 mai 1993), ed. Jacqueline Hamesse,Fédération internationale des instituts d’études médiévales, textes et études du Moyen Âge, 3 (Louvain-la-Neuve: Fédération internationale des instituts d’études médiévales, 1995), 371–86.

Diplomatics• Arthur Giry, Manuel de diplomatique (Paris: Hachette, 1894; rpt. Hildesheim: G. Olms, 1972).• Alain de Boüard, Manuel de diplomatique française et pontificale, 2 vols. (Paris: Picard, 1929-52)• Harry Breslau, Handbuch der Urkundenlehre für Deutschland und Italien, 3rd ed., 3 vols. (Berlin: W. de Gruyter,

1958–68).• Georges Tessier, Diplomatique royale française (Paris: Picard, 1962).• Hilary Jenkinson, Guide to Seals in the Public Records Office, 2nd ed. (London: H.M.S.O., 1968).• Pierre Chaplais, English Royal Documents: King John – Henry VI, 1199–1461 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1971).• Michel Pastoreau, Les Sceaux, Typologie des sources du Moyen Âge occidental, 36 (Turnout: Brepols, 1981).• Leonard E. Boyle, “Diplomatics,” in Medieval Studies: An Introduction, ed. James M. Powell, 2nd ed. (Syracuse:

Syracuse University Press, 1992), 82–113. A very good introduction to the subject with extensive bibliog-raphy.

• Olivier Guyotjeannin, Jacques Pycke, and Benoît-Michel Tock, Diplomatique médiévale, L’Atelier dumédiéviste, 2 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1993). Comprehensive overview of the subject with extensive bib-liography.

• P. D. A. Harvey and Andrew McGuinness, A Guide to British Medieval Seals (Toronto: University of TorontoPress, 1996).

129


Binding• E. Ph. Goldschmidt, Gothic & Renaissance Bookbindings, 2nd ed., 2 vols. (London: Vellekoop, 1928; rpt.

Nieuwkoop: B. de Graaf; Amsterdam: N. Israel, 1967).• Berthe Van Regemorter, “Évolution de la technique de la reliure du viiie au xiie siècle,” Scriptorium 2 (1948):

275–85, translated as “Evolution of Binding Technique from the VIIIth to the XIIth Century,” in BindingStructures in the Middle Ages: A Selection of Studies, trans. Jane Greenfield, Studia Bibliothecae Wittockianae,3 (Brussels: Bibliotheca Wittockiana; London: Maggs Bros., 1992), 23–41.

• The History of Bookbinding 525–1950 A.D.: An Exhibition held at the Baltimore Museum of Art November 12, 1957to January 12, 1958 (Baltimore: Walters Art Gallery, 1957).

• Graham Pollard, “Describing Medieval Bookbindings,” in Medieval Learning and Literature: Essays Presented toRichard William Hunt, ed. J.J.G. Alexander and M. T. Gibson (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1976), 50–65.

• Léon Gilissen, La Reliure occidentale antérieure à 1400, Bibliologia: Elementa ad librorum studia pertinentia,1 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1983).

• Carlo Federici, La Legatura medievale, 2 vols., Addenda: Studi sulla conoscenza, la conservazione e il restaurodel materiale librario, 2 (Rome: Istituto centrale per la patologia del libro, 1993).

• Otto Mazal, Einbandkunde: Die Geschichte des Bucheinbandes, Elemente des Buch- und Bibliothekswesens, 16(Wiesbaden: Ludwig Reichert Verlag, 1997).

• Jean-Louis Alexandre and Claire Maître, Catalogue des reliures médiévales conservées à la Bibliothèque municipaled’Autun, ainsi qu’à la Société d’Éduenne, Reliures médiévales des bibliothèques de France, 1 (Turnhout: Brepols,1997).

• J. A. Szirmai, The Archaeology of Medieval Bookbinding (Aldershot, Hants.: Ashgate, 1999). Includes an ex-tensive bibliography.

• Jean-Louis Alexandre, Geneviève Grand, and Guy Lanoë, Bibliothèque municipale de Vendôme, Reliuresmédiévales des bibliothèques de France, 2 (Turnhout: Brepols, 2000).

Sacred scripture, liturgical, and devotional works:• Victor Leroquais, Les Sacramentaires et les missels manuscrits des bibliothèques publiques de France, 3 vols. (Paris,

1924).• Falconer Madan, “The Localization of Manuscripts,” in Essays in History Presented to Reginald Lane Poole, ed.

H.W.C. Davis (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1927), 5–29.• Victor Leroquais, Les Livres d’heures manuscrits de la Bibliothèque nationale, 2 vols. (Paris, 1927).• Fernand Cabrol, Les Livres de la liturgie latine (Paris: Bloud & Gay, 1930), translated as The Books of the Latin

Liturgy (St. Louis, Mo.: Herder, 1932).• Paul Perdrizet, Le Calendrier parisien à la fin du Moyen Age d’après le bréviaire et les livres d’heures (Paris: Les

Belles lettres, 1933).• Victor Leroquais, Les Bréviaires manuscrits de bibliothèques publiques de France, 5 vols. (Paris, 1934).• Victor Leroquais, Les Pontificaux manuscrits des bibliothèques publiques de France, 4 vols. (Paris, 1937).• Victor Leroquais, Les Psautiers: Manuscrits latins des bibliothèques publiques de France, 2 vols. (Paris, 1940–41).• John Plummer, Liturgical Manuscripts for the Mass and the Divine Office (New York: Pierpont Morgan Library,

1964).• Guy Philippart, Les Légendiers latins et autres manuscrits hagiographiques, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge

occidental, 24–25 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1977).


130

• John P. Harthan, The Book of Hours (New York: Park Lane, 1977).• Jaques Dubois, Le Martyrologes du Moyen Âge latin, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge occidental, 26

(Turnhout: Brepols, 1978).• F. P. Pickering, The Calendar Pages of Medieval Service Books, Reading Medieval Studies, 1 (Reading: Reading

University Centre for Medieval Studies, 1980).• Andrew Hughes, Medieval Manuscripts for Mass and Office: A Guide to Their Organization and Terminology

(Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1982).• Christopher de Hamel, Glossed Books of the Bible and the Origins of the Paris Book Trade (Woodbridge, Suffolk:

D. S. Brewer, 1984).• Janet Backhouse, Books of Hours (London: British Library, 1985).• Laura Light, The Bible in the Twelfth Century: An Exhibition of Manuscripts at the Houghton Library (Cambridge,

Mass.: Harvard College Library, 1988).• Michel Huglo, Les Livres de chant liturgique, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge occidental, 52 (Turnhout:

Brepols, 1988).• Joseph Szövérffy, Latin Hyms, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge occidental, 55 (Turnhout: Brepols,

1989).• John Harper, Forms and Orders of Western Liturgy from the Tenth to the Eighteenth Century: A Historical Introduc-

tion and Guide for Students and Musicians (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1991).• Aimé Georges Martimort, Les Lectures liturgiques et leurs livres, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge occidental,

64 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1992).• Margaret T. Gibson, The Bible in the Latin West, The Medieval Book, 1 (Notre Dame, Ill.: University of

Notre Dame Press, 1993).• Knud Ottosen, The Responsories and Versicles of the Latin Office of the Dead (Aarhus: Aarhus University Press, 1993).• Marcel Metzger, Les Sacramentaires, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge occidental, 70 (Turnhout: Brepols,

1994).• Eric Palazzo, A History of Liturgical Books from the Beginning to the Thirteenth Century, trans. Madeleine Beau-

mont (Collegeville, Minn.: Liturgical Press, 1998).• Beverly Mayne Kienzle, ed., The Sermon, Typologie des sources au Moyen Âge occidental, 81–83 (Turnhout:

Brepols, 2000).• Jeanne E. Krochalis and E. Ann Matter, “Manuscripts of the Liturgy,” in The Liturgy of the Medieval Church,

ed. Thomas J. Heffernan and E. Ann Matter (Kalamazoo, Mich.: Western Michigan University, 2001),433–72.

• Roger S. Wieck, Time Sanctified: The Book of Hours in Medieval Art and Life, 2nd ed. (New York: Braziller,2001).

• Roger S. Wieck, “The Book of Hours,” in The Liturgy of the Medieval Church, ed. Thomas J. Heffernan and E.Ann Matter (Kalamazoo, Mich.: Western Michigan University, 2001), 473–513.

Other types of manuscripts• Peter Murray Jones, Medieval Medicine in Illuminated Manuscripts, rev. ed. (London: British Library, 1998).• Leslie M. Smith, Masters of the Sacred Page: Manuscripts of Theology in the Latin West to 1274, The Medieval

Book, 2 (Notre Dame, Ill.: University of Notre Dame Press, 2001).• Susan L’Engle and Robert Gibbs, Illuminating the Law: Medieval Legal Manuscripts in Cambridge Collections

(London: Harvey Miller, 2001).

131


Abbreviations• Ludwig Traube, Nomina sacra: Versuch einer Geschichte der christlichen Kurzung (Munich: C.H. Beck, 1907).• Charles Trice Martin, The Record Interpreter, 2nd ed. (London: Stevens, 1910; rpt. Hildesheim: G. Olms,

1969).• W. M. Lindsay, Notae Latinae: An Account of Abbreviations in Latin MSS. of the Early Minuscule Period (c. 700–

850) (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1915; rpt. with a supplement by Doris Bains on Latinabbreviations in manuscripts 850–1050, Hildesheim: G. Olms, 1963).

• José López de Toro, Abreviaturas hispanicas (Madrid: Direccion General de Archivos y Bibliotecas, JuntaTécnica de Archivos, Bibliotecas y Museos, 1957).

• Auguste Pelzer, Abbréviations latines médiévales: Supplément au Dizionario di abbreviature latine ed italiane deAdriano Cappelli, 2nd ed. (Louvain: Publications Universitaires; Paris: Béatrice-Nauwelaerts, 1966).

• Adriano Cappelli, Lexicon abbreviaturarum: Dizionario di abbreviature latine ed italiane, 6th ed. (Milan: UlricoHoepli, 1967).

• The Elements of Abbreviation in Medieval Latin Paleography, trans. David Heimann and Richard Kay, Univer-sity of Kansas Publications, Library Series, 47 (Lawrence, Kans.: University of Kansas Libraries, 1982).Translation of Cappelli’s introductory essay, “Brachigrafia medioevale,” from the Lexicon abbreviaturarum.

Chronology• Hermann Grotefend, Zeitrechnung des deutschen Mittelalters und der Neuzeit, 3 vols. (Hannover: Hahn, 1891–

98; rpt. Aalen: Scientia, 1984)• Adriano Cappelli, Cronologia, cronografia e calendario perpetuo, 2nd ed. (Milan: Hoepli, 1930).• Reginald Lane Poole, Medieval Reckonings of Time, Helps for Students of History, 3 (London: Society for

Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1935).• V. Grumel, La Chronologie (Paris: Presses universitaires de France, 1958).• Hermann Grotefend, Taschenbuch der Zeitrechnung des deutschen Mittelalters und der Neuzeit, 10. Aufl. (Hannover:

Hahn, 1960).• Eg. I. Strubbe, De Chronologie van de Middeleeuwen en de Moderne Tijden in de Nederlanden (Antwerp: Standaard-

Boekhandel, 1960; rpt. Bruxelles: Palais de Académies, 1991).• E. B. Fryde and F. M. Powicke, Handbook of British Chronology, 3rd ed., Royal Historical Society Guides and

Handbooks, 2 (London: Royal Historical Society, 1986).• R. Dean Ware, “Medieval Chronology,” in Medieval Studies: An Introduction, ed. James M. Powell (Syracuse,

N.Y.: Syracuse University Press, 1992), 252–77.• C. R. Cheney, A Handbook of Dates for Students of British History, rev. ed., Royal Historical Society Guides and

Handbooks, 4 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000).

Nomenclature• B. Bischoff, G. I. Lieftinck, and G. Battelli, Nomenclature des écritures livresques du IXe au XVIe siècle (Colloque

international de paléographie latine, Paris, 28–30 avril 1953) (Paris: C.N.R.S., 1954).• Lucia N. Valentine, Ornament in Medieval Manuscripts: A Glossary (London: Faber and Faber, 1965).• M. B. Parkes, English Cursive Book Hands, 1250–1500 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1969).• J. P. Gumbert, “A Proposal for a Cartesian Nomenclature,” in Essays Presented to G.I. Lieftinck, ed. J.P.

Gumbert and M. J. M De Haan, 4 vols., Litterae textuales (Amsterdam: A. L. Van Gendt, 1972–76),IV:45–52.


132

• François Garnier, Le Langage de l’image au Moyen Âge, 2 vols. (Paris: Le Léopard d’Or, 1982).• François Garnier, Thesaurus iconographique: Système descriptif des représetations, (Paris: Le Léopard d’Or, 1984).• Diplomatica et sigillographica: Travaux préliminaires de la Commission internationale de diplomatique et de la Commis-

sion internationale de sigillographie pour une normalisation internationale des éditions de documents et un vocabulaireinternational de la diplomatique et de la sigillographie. Folia Caesaraugustana, 1. Publicación … de la InstituciónFernando el Católico, 964 ( Zaragoza: Cátedra Zurita, 1984).

• Denis Muzerelle, Vocabulaire codicologique: Répertoire méthodique des termes français relatifs aux manuscrits, Rubricae,1 (Paris: CEMI, 1985).

• G. I. Lieftinck and J. P. Gumbert, Manuscrits datés conservés dans les Pays-Bas: Catalogue paléographique desmanuscrits en écriture latine portant des indications de date, 2: Les Manuscrits d’origine Néerlandaise (XIVe–XVIe

siècles) (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1988), 23–35.• Olga Weijers, ed., Vocabulaire du livre et de l’écriture au Moyen Âge: Actes de la table ronde, Paris, 24–26 septembre

1987, Études sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du Moyen Âge, 2 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1989).• Christine Jakobi, Buchmalerei: Ihre Terminologie in der Kunstgeschichte (Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1991).• H.-P. Neuhauser, “Typologie und Terminologie liturgischer Bücher,” Bibliothek: Forschung und Praxis 16 (1992):

45–65.• T. J. Brown, “Names of Scripts: A Plea to all Medievalists,” in A Palaeographer’s View: The Selected Writings of

Julian Brown, ed. Janet Bately, Michelle P. Brown, and Jane Roberts (London: Harvey Miller, 1993), 39–45.• École des hautes études en sciences sociales, Paris. Groupe d’anthropologie historique de l’Occident médiéval,

Thésaurus des images médiévales pour la constitution de bases de données iconographiques (Paris: Centre de rechercheshistoriques; École des hautes études en sciences sociales, 1993).

• Michelle P. Brown, Understanding Illuminated Manuscripts: A Guide to Technical Terms (Malibu, Calif.: J. PaulGetty Museum; London: British Library, 1994).

• Pilar Ostos et al., Vocabulario codicología, Instrumenta bibliológica (Madrid: Arcos Libros, 1997).• Marilena Maniaci, Terminologia del libro manoscritto, Addenda: Studi sulla conoscenza, la conservazione e il

restauro del material librario, 3 (Rome: Istituto centrale per la patologia del libro, 1998).• Jacques-Hubert Sautel, “Essai de terminologie de la mise en page des manuscrits à commentaire,” Gazette du

livre médiéval 35 (1999): 17–31.

�� "!$#&%&#�'�(*),+.-/)0#1-3242*57698;:�+=<7%�+>(�-Basic handbooks and practical manuals on how to catalog a manuscript—as opposed simply to con-cisely stated rules or instructions—are few, and this information tends to be dispersed. For explana-tion of the elements of a manuscript description, see:• Otto Mazal, Zur Praxis des Handschriftenbearbeiters, Elemente des Buch- und Bibliothekswesens, 11

(Wiesbaden: Ludwig Reichert Verlag, 1987), translated as The Keeper of Manuscripts, Bibliologia: Elementaad librorum studia pertinentia, 11 (Turnhout: Brepols, 1992), 16–24. Also includes an extensive bibliogra-phy of reference works commonly used in manuscript research.

• Armando Petrucci, La descrizione del manoscritto: Storia, problemi, modelli, Aggiornamenti, 45 (Rome: LaNuova Italia Scientifica, 1984). An excellent historical and comparative treatment of cataloging method-ologies, as well as practical guidance.

Other useful introductory works are:• Falconer Madan, Books in Manuscript: A Short Introduction to their Study and Use, 2nd ed., rev. (London: K. Paul,

133


Trench, Trubner & Co., 1920), 153–66.• R. B. Haselden, Scientific Aids for the Study of Manuscripts, Supplement to the Bibliographical Society’s trans-

actions, 10 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1935), 1–26 (though much of the scientific information inthis work is now outdated).

• E. Casamassima, “Note sul metodo della descrizione dei codici,” Rassegna degli Archivi di stato 23 (1963):181–205.

• L. M. J. Delaissé, James Marrow, and John de Wit, Illuminated Manuscripts: The James A. de Rothschild Collec-tion at Waddesdon Manor (Fribourg: National Trust, 1977), 13–20. An excellent, concise discussion of theimportance of paleographical, codicological, and decorative aspects in medieval book production and howthese features contribute to a catalog description.

• Raymond Macken, “Bref vade-mecum pour la description sur place d’un manuscrit médiéval,” Bulletin dephilosophie médiévale 21 (1979): 86–97.

• Alexander R. Rumble, “Using Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts,” in Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts: Basic Readings, ed.Mary P. Richards, Basic Readings in Anglo-Saxon England, 2 (New York: Garland, 1994), 3–24. Notdirected to cataloging per se, but addresses those features of manuscripts (not limited to those of Anglo-Saxon origin) most important for researchers to take note of and to record.

The modern, Anglo-American tradition of manuscript cataloging generally follows the methods andstandards developed by N.R. Ker for use in his own catalogs. See:• N. R. Ker, Medieval Manuscripts in British Libraries, 4 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1969–1992), I:vii-xiii.

Outlines sixteen “points of method” for manuscript description.• N. R. Ker, Catalogue of Manuscripts containing Anglo-Saxon (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1957), xx–xxiii. Sec-

tion on collation is reprinted in Medieval Manuscripts in British Libraries, III:vii.

Ker, in his turn, refined the methods and categories that had been elaborated earlier by M. R. James foruse in his own catalogs. See:• M. R. James, A Descriptive Catalogue of the Manuscripts in the Fitzwilliam Museum (Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press, 1895), xix–xli. Discusses “Points to be Observed in the Description and Collation ofManuscripts, particularly Books of Hours.”

• Richard W. Pfaff, “M. R. James on the Cataloguing of Manuscripts: A Draft Essay of 1906,” Scriptorium 31(1977): 103–18. A posthumously published brief essay on manuscript cataloging.

At the same time that M. R. James was cataloging manuscripts in Cambridge using a detailed, analyti-cal method, Falconer Madan was implementing a summary method of cataloging for use in catalogingthe manuscripts of the Bodleian Library in Oxford. See:• Falconer Madan, A Summary Catalogue of Western Manuscripts in the Bodleian Library at Oxford, 7 vols. (Ox-

ford: Clarendon Press, 1895–1953). Madan’s approach is set out schematically in vol. 3, p. x, given historicaland comparative background in vol. 1, pp. ix–lxxiv (esp. p. lxxiii), and provided with fuller explanation(with reference to Ker’s method) in Albinia de la Mare, Catalogue of the Collection of Medieval ManuscriptsBequeathed to the Bodleian Library, Oxford, by James P. R. Lyell (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1971), xxxi–xxxiii.

The method for expressing the collation of a manuscript used by Ker is widely employed, with more orless variation, within the Anglo-American cataloging tradition. This method differs significantly, how-


134

ever, from Continental methods. For a comparison of the two, see:• Frank Bischoff, “Methoden der Lagenbeschreibung,” Scriptorium 46 (1992): 3–27.

Many recent North-American manuscript catalogs explicitly acknowledge their debt to Ker. Theirown statements of methodology and the examples provided by their entries offer valuable illustrationsof the variety of ways in which Ker’s method may be applied. Among these catalogs, see:• Barbara A. Shailor, Catalogue of Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript

Library, Yale University, 3 vols., Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 34, 48, 100 (Binghamton, N.Y.:Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1984-92), I:xviii–xxi.

• C. W. Dutschke and R. H. Rouse, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the Claremont Libraries, Medievaland Renaissance Manuscripts in California Libraries, 1, University of California Publications: Catalogsand Bibliographies, 3 (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1986), xv–xvii.

• C. W. Dutschke, Guide to Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the Huntington Library, 2 vols. (San Marino,Calif.: Huntington Library, 1989), I:xv–xvii.

• Paul Saenger, A Catalogue of the Pre-1500 Western Manuscript Books at the Newberry Library (Chicago: Univer-sity of Chicago Press, 1989), xiv–xvi.

• Mirella Ferrari, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts at the University of California, Los Angeles, ed. R.H. Rouse, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in California Libraries, 2, University of Califor-nia Publications: Catalogs and Bibliographies, 7 (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991),xxv–xxvi.

• Laura Light, Catalogue of Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the Houghton Library, Harvard University,Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 145 (Binghamton, N.Y.: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Stud-ies, 1995–), xvi–xviii.

For their particular attention to illumination, see:• L. M. J. Delaissé, James Marrow, and John de Wit, Illuminated Manuscripts: The James A. de Rothschild Collec-

tion at Waddesdon Manor (Fribourg: National Trust, 1977).• Lilian M. C. Randall, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in the Walters Art Gallery, 3 vols. (Baltimore: Johns

Hopkins University Press, 1988–97).

For its particular attention to textual details, see:• Svato Schutzner, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscript Books in the Library of Congress: A Descriptive Catalog, 2

vols. (Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress, 1989–).

Among recent British catalogs in the tradition of Ker, see:• R.A.B. Mynors, Catalogue of the Manuscripts of Balliol College, Oxford (Oxford: Clarendon Press,

1963).• J. J.G. Alexander and A.C. de la Mare, The Italian Manuscripts in the Library of Major J.R. Abbey (New York:

Praeger, 1969).• Albinia de la Mare, Catalogue of the Collection of Medieval Manuscripts Bequeathed to the Bodleian Library, Oxford,

by James P.R. Lyell (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1971).• M.B. Parkes, The Medieval Manuscripts of Keble College, Oxford: A Descriptive Catalogue with Summary Descrip-

tions of the Greek and Oriental Manuscripts (London: Scholar Press, 1971).

135


• Andrew G. Watson, Catalogue of Dated and Datable Manuscripts c.700–1600 in the Department of Manuscripts,the British Library, 2 vols. (London: British Library, 1979).

• Andrew G. Watson, Catalogue of Dated and Datable Manuscripts c.435–1600 in Oxford Libraries, 2 vols. (Ox-ford: Clarendon Press, 1984).

• P.R. Robinson, Catalogue of Dated and Datable Manuscripts c.737–1600 in Cambridge Libraries, 2 vols.(Woodbridge, Suffolk: D. S. Brewer, 1988), I:1–12, 17–18. Discusses the nature of dating evidence indated or datable manuscripts.

• R.M. Thomson, Catalogue of the Manuscripts of Lincoln Cathedral Chapter Library (Woodbridge, Suffolk: D. S.Brewer, 1989).

• R.A.B. Mynors and R. M. Thomson, Catalogue of the Manuscripts of Hereford Cathedral Library (Cambridge:D.S. Brewer, 1993). With a contribution on bindings by Michael Gullick.

• Andrew G. Watson, A Descriptive Catalogue of the Medieval Manuscripts of All Souls College, Oxford (Oxford:Oxford University Press, 1997), xx–xxiii.

• Andrew G. Watson, A Descriptive Catalogue of the Medieval Manuscripts of Exeter College, Oxford (Oxford:Oxford University Press, 2000).

• R.M. Thomson, A Descriptive Catalogue of the Medieval Manuscripts in Worcester Cathedral Library (Woodbridge,Suffolk: D. S. Brewer, 2001). With a contribution on bindings by Michael Gullick.

Manuscript fragments and individual leaves present their own special problems for identification, cata-loging, and description. See:• N.R. Ker, Fragments of Medieval Manuscripts used as Pastedowns in Oxford Bindings, with a Survey of Oxford

Binding, c. 1515–1620, Oxford Bibliographical Society Publications, 5–8 (Oxford: Oxford BibliographicalSociety, 1954), vii–xx.

• Rowan Watson, Descriptive List of Fragments of Medieval Manuscripts in the University of London Library (Lon-don: University of London Library, 1976), iii–xvi.

• Rowan Watson, “Medieval Manuscript Fragments,” Archives 13 (1977): 61–73.• Elisabeth Pellegrin, “Fragments et membra disiecta,” Codicologica 3: Essais typologiques, Litterae textuales

(Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1980), 70–95.• William M. Voelkle and Roger S. Wieck, The Bernard H. Breslauer Collection of Manuscript Illuminations (New

York: Pierpont Morgan Library, 1992).• Robert G. Babcock, Reconstructing a Medieval Library: Fragments from Lambach (New Haven: Beinecke Rare

Book & Manuscript Library, 1993).• Roger S. Wieck, “Folia Fugitiva: The Pursuit of the Illuminated Manuscript Leaf,” Journal of the Walters Art

Gallery 54 (1996): 233–54.• Christopher de Hamel, Cutting Up Manuscripts for Pleasure and Profit (Charlottesville, Va.: Book Arts Press, 1996).• Sandra Hindman, Mirella Levi D’Ancona, Pia Palladino, and Maria Francesca Saffiotti, The Robert Lehman

Collection, IV: Illuminations (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1997).• Nicholas Pickwoad, “The Use of Fragments of Medieval Manuscripts in the Construction and Covering of

Bindings on Printed Books,” in Interpreting and Collecting Fragments of Medieval Books, ed. Linda L. Brownriggand Peggy Smith (Los Altos Hills, Calif.: Anderson-Lovelace/Red Gull Press, 2000), 1–20.

• Jan Brunius, “Medieval Manuscript Fragments in Sweden: A Catalogue Project,” in Interpreting and Collect-ing Fragments of Medieval Books, ed. Linda L. Brownrigg and Peggy Smith (Los Altos Hills, Calif.: Anderson-Lovelace/Red Gull Press, 2000), 157–65.


136

• Jennifer M. Sheppard, “Medieval Binding Structures: Potential Evidence from Fragments,” in Interpretingand Collecting Fragments of Medieval Books, ed. Linda L. Brownrigg and Peggy Smith (Los Altos Hills, Calif.:Anderson-Lovelace/Red Gull Press, 2000), 167–75.

For general considerations of cataloging theory and application not already cited above, see:• Léopold Delisle, Note sur le catalogue général des manuscrits des bibliothèques des départements (Nogent-le-Rotrou:

A. Gouverneur, 1873).• Léopold Delisle, Note sur les catalogues de la Bibliothèque nationale (Lille: L. Danel, 1889).• Andrew Clark, The Cataloguing of MSS in the Bodleian Library: A Letter Addressed to Members of Congregation by

the Outgoing Junior Proctor, 9 April 1890 (Oxford: Horace Hart, 1890).• Franz Ehrle, “Zur Geschichte der Katalogisierung der Vatikana,” Historisches Jahrbuch 11 (1890): 718–27.• M. Ortiz, “Per la catalogazione dei manoscritti delle biblioteche governative italiane,” Accademie e biblioteche

d’Italia 5 (1931): 11–19.• E.C. Richardson, A Union World Catalog of Manuscript Books: Preliminary Studies in Method, 6: Studies in Method

(New York: H.W. Wilson, 1937). See the review by Auguste Pelzer, “Un Essai américain de cataloguesommaire de tous les manuscrits,” Revue d’histoire eccésiastique 32 (1936): 621–30; rpt. in Études d’histoirelittéraire sur la scholastique médiévale, ed. Adrien Pattin and Émile van der Vyer, Philosophes médiévaux, 8(Louvain: Publications universitaires; Paris: Béatrice-Nauwelaerts, 1964), 97–109.

• Dorothy May Norris, A History of Cataloguing and Cataloguing Methods, 1100–1850 (London: Grafton, 1939).• L. Denecke, “Über die Ausbildung einer Instruktion für das Verzeichnis der Handschriften im Deutschen

Reich,” Zentralblatt für Bibliothekswesen 57 (1940).• Emil Wallner, “Inventarisierung und Katalogisierung von Handschriften,” Zentralblatt für Bibliothekswesen

57 (1940): 52–60.• Auguste Pelzer, “Osservazioni e reflessioni sui manoscritti e le biblioteche,” in Il libro e le biblioteche: Atti del

primo congresso bibliologico francescano internazionale, 20–27 febbraio 1949. 2 vols. (Rome: Pontificium Ath-enaeum Antonianum, 1950), I:399–412; translated as “Observations et réflexions sur les manuscrits et lesbibliothèques,” in Études d’histoire littéraire sur la scholastique médiévale, Philosophes médiévaux, 8 (Louvain:Publications Universitaires; Paris: Béatrice-Nauwelaerts, 1964), 21–34.

• Dorothy K. Coveney, “The Cataloguing of Literary Manuscripts,” The Journal of Documentation 6 (1950):125–39.

• W.J. Wilson, “Manuscript Cataloguing,” Traditio 12 (1956): 457–555.• Gilbert Ouy, “Pour une archivistique des manuscrits médiévaux,” Bulletin des bibliothèques de France 3 (1958):

897–923.• J. Porcher, “A propos des catalogues de manuscrits,” Bulletin des bibliothèques de France 5 (1960): 79–82.• G. Meyer, “Probleme der katalogisierung mittelalterlicher Handschriften,” Nachrichten der Vereinigung Schweizer

Bibliotekare 36 (1960): 1–9.• Gilbert Ouy, “Projet d’un catalogue de manuscrits médiévaux adapté aux exigences de la recherche moderne,”

Bulletin des bibliothèques de France 6 (1961): 319–35.• François Masai, “Le problème des catalogues de manuscrits médiévaux,” Bulletin des bibliothèques de France 8

(1963): 1–10.• G. Göller, “Methode des Katalogiesierens liturgischer Handschriften,” Mitteilungen der Arbeitsgemeinschaft

für rheinische Musikgeschichte 27 (1966): 90–91.

137


• M.L. Colker, “The Cataloguing of Medieval Manuscripts: A Review Article,” Mediaevalia et humanistica, n.s.,2 (1971): 165–73.

• Albert Derolez, “Les nouvelles instructions pour le catalogue des manuscrits en Republique Fédérale alle-mande,” Scriptorium 28 (1974): 299–300.

• M.C. Garand, “Le Catalogue des manuscrits datés en écriture Latine,” Codices manuscripti 1 (1975): 97–103.• Gilbert Ouy, “Comment rendre les manuscrits médiévaux accessibles aux chercheurs?” Codicologica, 4: Essais

méthodologiques, Litterae textuales (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1978), 9–58.• Gerhardt Powitz, “Zur Textaufnahme in Handschriftenkatalogen,” Codicologica, 4: Essais méthodologiques,

Litterae textuales (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1978), 59–66.• Gilbert Ouy, “Pour une organisation internationale de documentation automatisée sur les manuscrits et les

textes médiévaux,” Actas del V Congreso Internacional de Filosofia Medieval, 2 vols. (Madrid: Editora Nacional,1979), I:295–308.

• Paul Canart, “De la catalographie à l’histoire du livre: Vingt ans de recherche sur le manuscrits grecs,”Byzantion 50 (1980): 563–616.

• A. Gruijs and P. Holager, “Plan for Computer-assisted Codicography of Medieval Manuscripts,” Quaerendo11 (1981): 95–127.

• Gerold Hayer, “Richtlinien oder Dogma? Ein Beitrag zur Diskussion über die Richtlinien für dieHandschriftenbeschreibung in Österreich,” in Beiträge zur Überlieferung und Beschreibung deutscher Texte desMittelalters (Referate der 8. Arbeitstagung österreichischer Handschriften-Bearbeiter vom 25.–28. 11. 1981 in Rief beiSalzburg), ed. Ingo Reiffenstein, Göppinger Arbeiten zur Germanistik, 402 (Göppingen: Kümmerle Verlag,1983), 213–27.

• Felix Heinzer, “Les catalogues de manuscrits de la Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft,” Gazette du livremédiévale 4 (1984): 6–8.

• Renate Schipke, “L’Inventaire central des manuscrits médiévaux conservés en République DémocratiqueAllemande,” Gazette du livre médiévale 4 (1984): 8–10.

• Richard W. Clement, “Cataloging Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts: A Review,” Library Quarterly 55(1985): 316–26.

• Joachim-Felix Leonhard, “Manuscripts and Humanist Research: Functions and Goals of Manuscript Cata-loguing in the Federal Republic of Germany,” Libri 37 (1987): 179–95.

• J. Corhouts, “A MARC Format for Medieval Codices,” Gazette du livre médiévale 11 (1987): 13–17.• Albert Derolez, “Catalogues codicologiques,” Gazette du livre médiévale 12 (1988): 4–6.• Hope Mayo, “Standards for Description, Indexing and Retrieval in Computerized Catalogs of Medieval

Manuscripts,” in The Use of Computers in Cataloging Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts: Papers from the Inter-national Workshop in Munich, 10–12 August 1989, ed. Menso Folkerts and Andreas Kühne, Algorismus, 4(München: Institut für Geschichte der Naturwissenschaften, 1990), 19–39.

• Lucien Reynhout, “Pour une typologie des catalogues de manuscrits médiévaux: Contribution à un inventairecollectif en Belgique,” Archives et bibliothèques de Belgique 61 (1990): 5–37.

• Hope Mayo, “Medieval Manuscript Cataloging and the MARC Format,” Rare Books & ManuscriptsLibrarianship 6, no. 1 (1990): 11–22.

• Mirella Ferrari, Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts at the University of California, Los Angeles, ed. R.H. Rouse,Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts in California Libraries, 2, University of California Publications:Catalogs and Bibliographies, 7 (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991), xi–xvii.


138

• Hope Mayo, “MARC Cataloguing for Medieval Manuscripts: An Evaluation,” in Bibliographic Access to Me-dieval and Renaissance Manuscripts: A Survey of Computerized Data Bases and Information Services, ed. Wesley M.Stevens (New York: Haworth Press, 1992), 93–152.

• Ambroggio M. Piazzoni, “Lavori e progetti per l’informatizzazione orientata allo studio dei manoscrittinella Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana,” in Méthodologies informatiques et nouveaux horizons dans les recherchesmédiévales (Actes du Colloque internationale de Saint-Paul-de-Vence, 3–5 septembre 1990), ed. Jacqueline Hamesse,Société internationale pour l’étude de la philosophie médiévale, rencontres de philosophie médiévale, 2(Turnhout: Brepols, 1992): 159–76.

• Bernd Michael, “Handschriftenkatalogisierung in Deutschland: der Gesamtindex mittelalterlicherHandschriftenktaloge,” Gazette du livre médiévale 21 (1992): 13–17.

• Elizabeth Yakel, “Pushing MARC-AMC to its Limits: The Vatican Archives Project,” American Archivist 55(1992): 192–201.

• Gilbert Ouy, “Vers des bases de données sur les manuscrits médiévaux: pour une code descriptif normaliséà plusieurs niveaux,” Gazette du livre médiévale 20 (1992): 1–7.

• Richard W. Pfaff, “N.R. Ker and the Study of English Medieval Manuscripts,” in Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts:Basic Readings, ed. Mary P. Richards, Basic Readings in Anglo-Saxon England, 2 (New York: Garland,1994), 55–77.

• Peter van Minnen, “Introducing the Online Catalogue of the Duke Papyrus Collection,” Bulletin of the AmericanSociety of Papyrologists 31 (1994): 159–70.

• Gerhardt Powitz, “Cataloguing Medieval Manuscripts: Work in Progress and Transition,” in Bilan et per-spectives des études médiévales en Europe: Actes du permier Congrès européen d’ètudes médiévales (Spoleto, 27–29 mai1993), éd. Jacqueline Hamesse, Fédération internationale des instituts d’études médiévales, textes et étudesdu Moyen Âge, 3 (Louvain-la-Neuve: Fédération internationale des instituts d’études médiévales, 1995),387–97.

• Barbara A. Shailor, “A Cataloger’s View,” in The Whole Book: Cultural Perspectives on the Medieval Miscellany, ed.Stephen G. Nichols and Siegfried Wenzel (Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1996): 153–67.

• Rowan Watson, “Automation and the Medieval Manuscript: Out of MARC and into the Web,” Gazette dulivre médiévale 31 (1997): 41–46.

• Lou Burnard, Richard Gartner, and Peter Kidd, “The Cataloguing of Western Medieval Manuscripts inthe Bodleian Library: A TEI Approach with an Appendix Describing a TEI-Conformant ManuscriptDescription,” (URL: http://users.ox.ac.uk/~lou/wip/MS, August 1997).

• Eva Nilsson Nylander and Sever J. Voicu, “Queen Christina’s Latin Manuscripts in the Vatican Library—A Cataloguing Project,” in Clavis memoriae: Ett seminarium om datoriserad katalogisering av handskriftsmaterial(Svenska institut I Rom, 22–26 april, 1996), ed. Eva Nilsson Nylander, Kungl. Bilbioteket rapport, 23 (Stokholm:Kungl. Biblioteket, 1997), 82–92.

• Arno Mentzel-Reuters, “Literaturbericht Handschriftenkataloge,” Deutsches Archiv für Erforschung desMittelalters 54 (1998): 583–611.

• Gregory A. Pass, “Electrifying Research in Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts,” Papers of the Biblio-graphical Society of America 94 (2000): 507–30.

• Elizabeth O’Keefe, “Medieval Manuscripts on the Internet,” Journal of Religious & Theological Information 3,no. 2 (2000): 9–47.

• Laurence S. Creider, “Accessing Medieval Religious Manuscripts on OCLC,” Journal of Religious & Theologi-cal Information 3, no. 2 (2000): 49–63.

139


• Guilia Ammannati, “La Catalogazione del manoscritto: Alcune riflessioni,” Scritura e civiltà 24 (2000):375–85.

For discussions of a wider range of issues in manuscript cataloging, the proceedings of a number ofconferences and collected studies devoted to the subject are available. See:• Clemens Köttelwesch, ed., Zur Katalogisierung mittelalterlicher und neuerer Handschriften, Zeitschrift für

Bibliothekswesen und Bibliographie, Sonderheft (Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1963).• Otto Mazal, ed., Handschriftenbeschriebung in Österreich: Referate, Beratungen und Ergebnisse der Arbeitstagungen

in Kremsmünster (1973) und Zwettl (1974), Veröffentlichungen der Kommission für Schrift- und Buchwesendes Mittelalters, Rhe. 2, Bd. 1, Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften philosophisch-historischeKlasse Denkschriften, 122 (Vienna: Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1975).

• Maria Cecilia Cuturi, ed., Il Manoscritto: Situazione catalografica e proposta di una organizzazione delladocumentazione e delle informazioni (Atti del Seminario di Roma, 11–12 giugno 1980) (Rome: Istituto centrale peril catalogo unico delle biblioteche italiane e per le informaztioni bibliografiche, 1981).

• Ingo Reiffenstein, ed., Beiträge zur Überlieferung und Beschreibung deutscher Texte des Mittelalters (Referate der 8.Arbeitstagung österreichischer Handschriften-Bearbeiter vom 25.–28. 11. 1981 in Rief bei Salzburg), GöppingerArbeiten zur Germanistik, 402 (Göppingen: Kümmerle Verlag, 1983).

• Geneviève Grand, ed., Les Manuscrits datés: Premier bilan et perspectives, Neuchâtel 1983 = Die datiertenHanschriften: erste Bilanz und Perspektiven, Neuenburg 1983, Rubricae, 2 (Paris: CEMI, 1985).

• Helmar Härtel, et al., eds., Probleme der Bearbeitung mittelalterlicher Handschriften, Wolfenbütteler Forschungen,30 (Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 1986).

• T. Gargiulo, ed., Documentare il manoscritto: Problematica di un censimento (Atti del Seminario di Roma, 6–7 aprile1987) (Rome: Istituto centrale per il catalogo unico delle biblioteche italiane e per le informaztionibibliografiche, 1987).

• Catalogiseren van handschriften en oude drukken in België: Typologie, normen en automatisering. Lezingen gehoudenop de vergaderingen van de Belgische Commissie voor Bibliografie, in de Koninklijke Bibliotheek Albert I, op 18 april en12 decembre 1988 = Le Catalogage de manuscrits et d’imprimés anciens en Belique: Typologie, normes et automatisation.Communications présentés lors des réunions organisées par la Commission belge de bibliographie, à la Bibliothèque royaleAlbert Ier, les 18 avril et 12 décembre 1988, a special issue of Archives et bibliothèques de Belgique 61 (1990).

• Menso Folkerts and Andreas Kühne, eds., The Use of Computers in Cataloging Medieval and Renaissance Manu-scripts: Papers from the International Workshop in Munich, 10–12 August 1989, Algorismus, 4 (Munich: Institutfür Geschichte der Naturewissenschaften, 1990).

• Hope Mayo, ed., MARC Cataloguing for Medieval Manuscripts, a special issue of Rare Books & ManuscriptsLibrarianship 6, no. 1 (1990).

• Wesley M. Stevens, ed., Bibliographic Access to Medieval and Renaissance Manuscripts: A Survey of ComputerizedData Bases and Information Services (New York: Haworth Press, 1992).

• A. D�urova and P. Schreiner, eds., Actes de la table ronde: principes et méthodes du cataloguage des manuscrits grecsde la collection du Centre Dujèev (Sofia, 21–23 août, 1990), Publications du programme de la cooperation entrele Centre “Ivan Dujèev,” de l’Université “St. Kliment Ohridski” de Sofia, et l’Université Aristote deThessalonique, 1 (Thessalonique: Aristoteleio Panepistémio Thessalonikés, 1992).

• Metodologie informatiche per il censimento e la documentazione dei manoscritti (Atti dell’Incontro internazionale diRoma, 18–20 marzo 1991), (Rome: Istituto centrale per il catalogo unico delle biblioteche italiane e per leinformazioni bibliografiche, 1993).


140

• Eva Nilsson Nylander, ed., Clavis memoriae: Ett seminarium om datoriserad katalogisering av handskriftsmaterial(Svenska institut I Rom, 22–26 april, 1996), Kungl. Bilbioteket rapport, 23 (Stokholm: Kungl. Biblioteket,1997).

Various national and institutional bodies have issued official codifications of rules for manuscriptcataloging. Some of these rules are still in force, while others have been superceded or have simplypassed into disuse.• France. Ministère de l’instruction publique, des beaux-arts et des cultes.

Léopold Delisle, Note sur la rédaction des catalogues de manuscrits (Paris: Plon, 1884); reprinted in Bulletin desbibliothèques et des archives 1 (1884): 94–109.

• Österreichische Leo-Gesellschaft.Regulativ für die Bearbeitung von Manuscripten-Katalogen (Vienna: Österreichische Leo-Gesellschaft, 1895).

• Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana.“Leges quas curatores bibliothecae Vaticanae in codicibus Latinis recensendis sibi constituerunt,” in MarcoVattasso et Pio Franchi de’ Cavalieri, Codices Vaticani Latini I: Codices 1-678 (Rome: Typis Vaticanis, 1902), x–xiv.

• France. Ministère de l’education nationale.Léopold Delisle, Instructions pour la rédaction d’un catalogue de manuscrits et pour la rédaction d’un inventaire desincunables conservés dans les bibliothèques de France (Paris: H. Champion, 1910).

• Spain. Junta Facultativa de Archivos, Bibliotecas y Museos.Instrucciones para la catalogaciòn de manuscritos, estampas, dibujos originales, fotografías y piezas de musica de lasbibliotecas públicas (Madrid: Imp. de la “Revista de archivos,” 1910).

• Anglo-American Conference of Historians. Anglo-American Historical Committee.“Report on Editing Historical Documents,” Bulletin of the Institute of Historical Research 1 (1923): 6–25.

• Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana.Norme per l’indice alfabetico dei manoscritti (Vatican City: Typis Vaticanis, 1938).

• Bibliothèque nationale de France.“Règles suivies pour la rédaction des notices du catalogue du fonds latin,” in Catalogue général des manuscritslatins, 1 (Paris: Bibliothèque nationale, 1939), v–vii; supplementary rules regarding title, content, andcodicology given in vol. 7 (Paris: Bibliothèque nationale, 1988), ix–x.

• Commission per la Pubblicazione degli Indice e Cataloghi delle Biblioteche Italiane.“Regole per la descrizione dei manoscritti,” in Ugo Costa, Codice delle biblioteche italiane (Rome: Istitutopoligrafico dello Stato, Libreria, 1949).

• Spain. Dirección General de Archivos y Bibliotecas.Instrucciones para la catalogación manuscritos, Anejos del Boletín de la Dirección general de archivos y bibliotecas,34 (Madrid: Junta técnica de archivos, bibliotecas y museos, 1957.

• Deutsche Staatsbibliothek. Zentrale Leiteinrichtung für Handschriften und Österreichische Akademieder Wissenschaften.“Richtlinien und Terminologie für die Handschriftenbeschreibung,” in Handschriftenbeschriebung in Österreich:Referate, Beratungen und Ergebnisse der Arbeitstagungen in Kremsmünster (1973) und Zwettl (1974), ed. Otto Mazal,Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften philosophisch-historische Klasse Denkschriften, 122;Veröffentlichungen der Kommission für Schrift- und Buchwesen des Mittelalters, II,1 (Vienna:Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1975), 133–72.

141


• Institut de recherche et d’histoire des textes.Guide pour l’elaboration d’une notice de manuscrit, Bibliographies, colloques, travaux preparatoires: Serieinformatique et documentation textuelle (Paris: C.N.R.S., 1977).

• Inkunabeln. Kommission für Handschriften und Inkunabeln.Ursula Winter, Renate Schipke, and Hans-Erich Teitge, Regeln für die Katalogisierung von Handschriften(Berlin: Deutsche Staatsbibliothek, 1983).

• Centre international d’information sur les sources de l’histoire balkanique et méditerranéene.Description et catalogage des manuscrits médiévaux, ed. O. Nikolèeva et al., Balcanica, 3, Études et documents, 3(Sofia: Centre international d’information sur les sources de l’histoire balkanique et méditerranéene, 1984).

• Society of American Archivists.Stephen L. Hensen, Archives, Personal Papers, and Manuscripts: A Cataloging Manual for Archival Repositories,Historical Societies, and Manuscript Libraries, 2nd ed. (Chicago: Society of American Archivists, 1989).

• Istituto Centrale per il Catalogo Unico delle Biblioteche Italiane e per le Informazioni Bibliografiche.Guida a una descrizione uniforme dei manoscritti e al loro censimento, ed. Viviana Jemolo and Mirella Morelli(Rome: Istituto centrale per il catalogo unico delle biblioteche italiane e per le informazioni bibliografiche,1990).

• Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft. Unterausschuß für Handschriftenkatalogisierung.Richtlinien Handschriftenkatalogisierung, 5th ed. (Bonn: Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft, 1992).

• American Library Association / Library Association / Canadian Library Association.Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, 2nd ed., rev. (Chicago: American Library Association; London: LibraryAssociation; Ottowa: Canadian Library Association, 1998), chp. 4.


142

143

Appendix G: Glossary

� � � � � � � � �

The following list consists only of those technical terms encountered in the text of Descriptive Catalog-ing of Ancient, Medieval, Renaissance, and Early modern Manuscripts. They are given only a functionaldefinition here for use in conjunction with these guidelines and their definitions are not intended to becomprehensive or definitive beyond this context. More detailed information on these terms should besought in appropriate specialized reference works, such as Denis Muzerelle, Vocabulaire codicologique:répertoire méthodique des termes français relatifs aux manuscrits (Paris: CEMI, 1985); Michelle P. Brown,Understanding Illuminated Manuscripts: A Guide to Technical Terms (Malibu, Calif.: J. Paul Getty Museum;London: British Library, 1994); or Marilena Maniaci, Terminologia del libro manoscritto, Addenda: Studisulla conoscenza, la conservazione e il restauro del material librario, 3 (Rome: Istituto centrale per lapatologia del libro, 1998). Other terms not specifically defined here are assumed to accord with thosegiven in the glossary that accompanies AACR2R.

AutographA signature written by the individual to whom it belongs. Do not confuse with the subscribed attesta-tion of an individual recorded by a scribe or notary, such as a witness in a legal document. See alsoHOLOGRAPH

AscenderThe upright stroke of a letter extending above the HEADLINE, e.g. as in b, d, and h.

BaselineThe line of writing (independent of the actual RULING) upon which the body or minim of a letter rests.In a block of text lacking frame-ruling, used as the extreme lower line from which the written space ofa manuscript is measured. Elements of a letter extending below the baseline are called DESCENDERS.See also HEADLINE

BifoliumA sheet of writing material (usually parchment, paper, or papyrus) folded in half to produce a pair ofconjugate leaves. Multiple bifolia inserted into one another and sewn together through the fold makeup a QUIRE.

Bulk dateInclusive range of dates for the greatest concentration of items or works encompassed within a largercollection whose extreme dates exceed those of the greatest concentration.


144

BynameThe familiar name or nickname, as opposed to the official SHELFMARK, by which a famous manuscriptis popularly known. Also known collectively as ocelli nominum.

CatchwordA word or phrase written in the lower margin of the verso of the last leaf of a QUIRE that correspondsto the first word or phrase of the following quire. Used as a device to ensure the proper ordering ofquires when gathered together as a book. Orientation on the page is usually horizontal, but may alsobe vertical in later examples, or even diagonal. Catchwords may be plain or decorated. See also QUIRE

SIGNATURE and LEAF SIGNATURE.

ChirographA document written in duplicate on the same sheet with the texts written in opposite orientation toone another and a space left between the texts where the word Chirographum (or some other word,phrase, or series of letters) was customarily, though not always, written, and through which a straightor indented cut was made separating the two halves and producing copies that were the physical coun-terparts of one another. Used as a means of authentication. Also commonly known as an indenture(when written in triplicate or quadruplicate known as an indenture tripartite or quadripartite).

Codex (pl. codices)Form of the book composed of collected sheets of writing material (usually parchment, paper, or papy-rus) folded double to form bifolia which are then gathered into quires sewn together through thecenter fold which are themselves then assembled into sequential order and usually provided with aprotective cover. A codex may consist of a single quire or many, and contain one or many individualmanuscripts.

ColophonA statement, usually found at the end of a manuscript, though it may appear instead at the beginning,that provides information regarding the date, place, agency, or reason for production of the manu-script. Sometimes referred to as a subscription, particularly when only the scribe and date are speci-fied. The colophon may be separate from or part of the closing rubric.

Composite codex manuscriptA manuscript codex composed of two or more physical parts of varying origin or date of productionthat have been subsequently bound together.

DescenderThe upright stroke of a letter extending below the BASELINE, e.g. as in p and q.

Diplomatic transcriptionA method of transcription used in the production of a diplomatic edition (distinct from a type fac-simile) that attempts to represent by means of a system of editorial signs the physical state of anindividual manifestation of the text of a work, reproducing original spellings, punctuation, and capi-

145


talization and showing all additions, suppressions, or substitutions made to the text at the time of andsubsequent to its creation.

DorseThe reverse or back of a letter or legal document.

EschatocolThe concluding section of a legal document, such as a charter. In a public document, the eschatocolnormally contains the attestation of the principal parties involved, witnesses, notaries, etc., and a dat-ing clause indicating day, month, year, and place of execution.

ExplicitThe closing words of the text proper of a work, exclusive of any closing RUBRIC that might follow it.Commonly the introductory word of the closing rubric, though finit is also used. Originally an abbre-viation of the Latin explicitus, as in the phrase explicitus est liber, meaning “the book is unrolled,” a usagetaken over into the codex form of the book from the earlier roll. Used from the Middle Ages as a 3rd

person singular verb meaning “here ends,” the plural form being expliciunt.

FoliationSequential numbering of individual leaves. The front of the leaf is referred to as the recto (r) and theback as the verso (v).

FolioAs a term of codicological description, one of the paired leaves of a BIFOLIUM. As a term of biblio-graphical reference, may be applied to either one of the paired leaves of a bifolium or to a singleton.Abbreviated as fol. or fols.

GatheringSee QUIRE.

GlossMarginal or interlinear comment, citation, interpretation, translation, etc., the purpose of which is toexplain or expand the meaning of a text.

Grade of scriptThe level of execution employed in the writing of a given type of SCRIPT, determined by thedegree of care and rapidity (ductus) exercised in drawing its letter forms. Formal definition in thegrades of script are applied most frequently within the Gothic system of scripts: formata (care-fully and slowly drawn), libraria or media (drawn with medium care and speed), and cursiva (rap-idly drawn).

HandThe characteristics exhibited by an individual in the writing of a SCRIPT.


146

HeadlineThe line above which the bodies of letters within a line of writing rise no higher, i.e. excludingASCENDERS.

HolographA manuscript in the handwriting of its author. See also AUTOGRAPH

IlluminationAny painted or penwork decoration (particularly gold or silver) used to adorn a manuscript, includingsuch features as canon tables, calendars, carpet pages, author, donor, or evangelist portraits, miniatures,initials, borders, etc., but excluding such features as simple pen-flourished letters and line fillers, or thehighlighting of letters or paragraph marks within a text usually executed in red or blue ink.

IncipitThe opening words of the text proper of a work, exclusive of any opening RUBRIC that might precede it,of sufficient length to identify the work uniquely. Frequently used during the Middle Ages as a meansof reference to a work, or to a specific passage or chapter within a work, in place of a title. Also com-monly the introductory word of the opening rubric. From the Latin incipere, meaning “here begins,” theplural form being incipiunt.

LeafOne of the individual units (FOLIO or singleton) making up a BIFOLIUM, QUIRE, or book. A leaf pos-sesses a front and a back, described as recto and verso, and may contain writing or decoration on oneor both sides, or neither. As a term of codicological description, it is referred to as a leaf, regardless ofwhether it is foliated or paginated. As a term of bibliographical reference, it is referred to as a folio if ithas been foliated (with the recto or verso sides specified), or each of its sides is referred to individuallyas a page if it has been paginated.

Leaf signatureA combination of letters and numbers written on the recto of the first-half of the leaves of a QUIRE

used as a device to ensure the proper ordering of quires within a book and leaves within a quire. Theindividual elements of the leaf signature designating the quire and the leaf are themselves sometimesreferred to separately as the QUIRE SIGNATURE and the LEAF SIGNATURE.

Line FillerA simple or decorated line or bar drawn to fill or justify any remaining unoccupied space in a line oftext against a (usually) right margin.

ManuscriptFrom the Latin manu scriptus, meaning “written by hand.” Both an adjective and a noun used to describea method of production and its product: a book, letter, document, etc. written by hand, usually onparchment, paper, or papyrus. Use in distinction to CODEX to denote a component item making uppart of a COMPOSITE MANUSCRIPT CODEX. As a noun, not applied to writing as inscribed on clay, stone,

147


etc., nor properly to items such as typescripts, mimeographs, or other mechanical or electronic meansof substitution for handwriting.

MinimThe upright stroke of a letter standing between the BASELINE and HEADLINE, e.g. as in m, n, u, and i.

Opisthograph (alt. Opistograph)A MANUSCRIPT containing writing on both the recto and the verso, but generally used only to describea ROLL possessing this feature.

PaginationSequential numbering of each side, or page, of a LEAF.

PalimpsestAny writing SUPPORT (parchment, paper, or papyrus) whose original text has been erased and whichhas been subsequently reused to receive other writing. The original text may still be visible or recover-able through the use of ultra-violet light.

ParchmentGeneric term used to denote any writing SUPPORT material made from animal skin, such as sheep, goat,calf, etc. VELLUM is a term properly applied only to calf skin, which produces a very fine, white, and thinwriting surface lacking the imperfections commonly found in the skins of other or older animals.However, owing to its qualitative associations the term vellum is frequently misapplied to writingsupport material from any animal that has been prepared to a similarly high level of quality. The termparchment is to be preferred in all cases.

ProtocolThe opening section of a public legal document, such as a charter, normally containing the invocation,superscription, address, and salutation.

QuireA gathering of usually two or more BIFOLIA (or combination of bifolia and singletons) inserted into oneanother and sewn together through the fold. One or more quires sewn together may comprise a CODEX.

Quire signatureA number or letter written on the verso of the last LEAF of a QUIRE that follows in sequence the numberor letter of the preceding quire and is used as a device to ensure the proper ordering of quires within abook. Distinct from LEAF SIGNATURE. Also known as quire numeration.

RollSheets of parchment, paper, or papyrus sewn or pasted to one another to form a continuous writingsurface with the text oriented horizontally (usual in the case of papyrus) or vertically (usual in the caseof parchment and paper) along the length of the roll.


148

RubricA heading, characteristically written in red ink, that either precedes a body of text and introduces thetitle of the work or its subdivisions (known as an opening rubric), or follows a body of text or itssubdivisions and signals the conclusion of the work or subdivision (known as a closing rubric). Anopening rubric normally begins with the word incipit and a closing rubric with the word explicit, thoughboth are distinct from the INCIPIT and EXPLICIT as the opening and closing words of the text proper ofa work.

RulingA combination of horizontal and vertical bounding lines drawn or incised in simple or complex pat-terns used to set out the written space on a page and to guide the line of writing across the page. Alsodescribes the process of ruling. Ruling may be drawn in dry or hard point using a stylus (i.e., “ruled indry point”), in lead or silver point (i.e., “ruled in lead,” or “ … in plummet,” or “… in crayon,” or “… inpencil”), or in ink using a pen (i.e., “ruled in pen”). A text block enclosed in upper and lower horizontaland inner and outer vertical bounding lines is said to be frame-ruled.

ScriptA system of lettering or writing that possesses discernable characteristic features and which is identi-fiable as a type. A model or standard that guides the drawing of letter forms by an individual scribe.See also GRADE OF SCRIPT and HAND.

SealAn impression on malleable material, usually wax (sometimes metal, and later commonly shellac or apaper wafer), made by a matrix engraved with images or characters indicating personal or corporateidentity and used as a means of authentication. Term applied equally to the impression as to the objectitself as well. Attached to a document by cords or slips of parchment (pendant), or applied directly toa document (en placard).

Secundo folioThe first word or words of text appearing on the second leaf of a work or manuscript. Frequently citedin medieval (usually institutional) library catalogs as a means of distinguishing between multiple cop-ies of the same work which share the same INCIPIT.

ShelfmarkA mark consisting of a combination of letters, numbers, or names usually indicating the physical loca-tion of a manuscript within a particular fonds, room, bookcase, or press and its position relative toother items on the same shelf or within the sequence of a collection. May also, or instead, possesstopical signification or indicate accession or inventory order. In the past and today commonlyused as the official designation for a manuscript and as the organizing principle for a manu-scripts catalog.

Sign manualA notary’s device or mark used as a means of authentication.

149


SupportMaterial (usually parchment, paper, or papyrus) used to receive writing or decoration. Also known asmaterial support or writing support.

Title pageSeparate page at the beginning of a MANUSCRIPT given over predominantly to the display of the titleand (usually) statement of responsibility of a work, or a text page at the beginning of a manuscript onwhich the title and statement of responsibility is physically distinguished from the text proper andappears more prominently than as simply part of the opening RUBRIC or as a running title.

VellumAs a specific material designation (see 5C1), use PARCHMENT.


150

151

Index

� �

Page numbers in italics refer to the examples inAppendix C and Appendix D.

AAACR2 (Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules)

capitalization in, 11concordance with AMREMM, 119–124treatment of manuscripts, xii

abbreviationsbibliography, 130–131in note area, 50in title added entry, 78–79transcription of (rule 0F8), 8, 12–13

access, restrictions on, notes on (rule 7B24), 72,107

accompanying materialnotes on (rule 7B13), 67, 104in physical description (rule 5E1), 46, 98

acquisition information, notes on (rule 7B16),68, 105

added entries (App. A), 77–82concordance between rule sets, 123–124levels of description in, 6

additional physical form, notes on (rule 7B22),71, 106

alternative title, transcription of, 19ampersand (&), transcription of, 12AMREMM (Descriptive Cataloging of Ancient,

Medieval, Renaissance, and Early ModernManuscripts), concordance with otherrules, 119–124

analysis, 83–85bibliography, 126concordance with AACR2, 124levels of description in, 6

analytical added entries (rule A2.2), 77–78Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. See AACR2annotations, notes on, 54APPM (Archives, Personal Papers, and Manu-

scripts)concordance with AMREMM, 119–124treatment of manuscripts, xii

archival recordschief source of information, 2dimensions, 46extent of item, 43supplied title for (rule 1B2.3), 26, 93

ascender, definition, 143author-title added entries, 78autograph, definition, 143

Bbaseline, definition, 143Bible. See Sacred scripture; Standard worksbibliography, 125–141bifolium, definition, 143binding

bibliography, 128–129notes on (rule 7B12), 66–67, 104as source of information, 3

blank pages in contents notes, 56books, manuscripts as, xii


152

“bound with” notes, 83bulk date

definition, 143in supplied titles, 25, 26

bynames for manuscriptadded entry for uniform title, 80definition, 144notes on (rule 7B18), 69, 105–106

Ccapitalization in transcription (rule 0F3), 11cataloging history, notes on (rule 7B27), 72–73,

107cataloging of manuscripts

bibliography on, 132–141characteristics of, xi

catalogs, publishednotes on, 68as source of information, 3–4

catchwordsdefinition, 144notes on (rule 7B7.3), 62–63

chief source of information (rule 0B1), 2–3chirograph

definition, 144notes on, 54

chronology, bibliography for, 131citations for manuscripts. See Shelfmarks, notes

oncodex/codices. See also Composite codex manu-

scriptsdefinition, 144in format notes, 53

codiology, bibliography of, 128collation, notes on (rule 7B7.1), 60–61, 102collection-level cataloging, xicollections, analysis of, 83collections of legal documents, supplied titles, 26collections of letters, supplied titles (rule 1B2.2),

25, 93collective title, items without

description (rule 1B1.4-1B1.5), 19–21, 91

supplied title for, 23title added entries, 79

colophondefinition, 144as source of information, 2, 3, 35

columnsextent of item, 43notes, 63

commentariesnotes on, 54with texts lacking title, 22–23

commentary in written space, 45common names for manuscripts. See Bynames

for manuscript[Commonplace book] as supplied title, 23compiled works. See Standard workscomponent parts in format notes, 53composite codex manuscripts

analysis of, 83dates for, 39definition, 144in format notes, 53language note, 54place of production of, 37

concordance with other rule sets (App. E), 119–124

constituent work, 84, 114–116contents list

as source of information, 3in title area, 16

contents notes (rule 7B5), 55–56, 100–102compiled or standard works (rule 7B5.3), 58–

59, 100–101levels of description in, 6multiple works (rule 7B5.4), 59–60, 102single work (rule 7B5.2), 57–58, 100vs. linking entries, 83

contractions, transcription of, 12copyright restrictions, 72corporate bodies, added entries for, 77, 82corrections in manuscript. See Manuscript

corrections

153

Index

cover title as source of information, 3

Ddashes replacing omission marks, 5date of binding, notes on, 66date of production

description (rule 4D), 38–39, 95–96note on, 55

dates in supplied titles of letters, legal docu-ments, and archival records (rule 1B2.1),24–25

DCRB (Descriptive Cataloging of Rare Books),concordance with AMREMM, 119–124

decorationnotes on (rule 7B10), 64–66, 103–104in physical details, 44

defects in item, notes on, 54descender, definition, 144Descriptive Cataloging of Ancient, Medieval, Renais-

sance, and Early Modern Manuscripts,(AMREMM), concordance with otherrules, 119–124

Descriptive Cataloging of Rare Books (DCRB),concordance with AMREMM, 119–124

detailed descriptionadded entries in (rule A3.2), 81–82contents notes, 55–56generally, 6legal document, MARC cataloging record

example, 116–117literary work, MARC cataloging record

example, 112–116required notes (rule 7A4.2), 51–52

devotional works. See Liturgical and devotionalworks

diacritical marks, transcription of (rule 0F3), 11dimensions of item (rules 5D1-5D2), 44–46, 98diplomatic transcription

as cataloging option, 8and corrections in manuscript, 12definition, 144–145in note area, 50

diplomatics, bibliography of, 128document in format notes, 54donor of manuscript, notes on, 67dorse

definition, 145as source of information, 3

Eedition/version area (rule 2), 31–32, 95

concordance between rule sets, 121language of description, 7

electronic formats, notes on, 71endpapers in extent of item, 42erroneous information. See also Misspellings

place and date of production area, 36in statement of responsibility (rule 1F6), 30in titles, 19

eschacoldefinition, 145as source of information, 2

[etc.], use of, in items lacking a collective title, 21explicit

definition, 145in note area, 50–51, 57as source of information, 3

extent of item. See also Collationmultiple volumes or items (rules 5B4-5B5),

43, 97notes on, 61single volumes or items (rules 5B1-5B3), 42–

43, 96–97

Ffacsimile editions of manuscripts, 2fictitious place or date of production, 36[Florilegium] as supplied title, 23flyleaves

extent of item, 42notes on, 61

foliationdefinition, 145not in extent of item, 42


154

notes on, 61folio, definition, 145fore-edge title as source of information, 3format notes (rule 7B1.1), 52–53, 98–99fragments

extent of item, 42in format notes, 53

frame rulingsdescription of, 44–45in notes, 63

full stop, omission of, 5

Ggatherings

definition, 145in format notes, 53

general material designation (rule 1C), 27genre in supplied titles, 23glossary (App. G), 143–149glosses

definition, 145in dimensions, 45note on, 54with texts lacking title, 22–23

grade of script. See Script, grade of

Hhand, definition, 145headline, definition, 146holograph


host item records, 83–84. See also Constituentwork

MARC cataloging record example, 112–114hyphens in illegible text, 12

Ii/j, transcription of, 9–10illegible text, transcription of

in title added entries, 78in title proper (rule 0F6), 12

illuminationdefinition, 146notes on, 64

illustrative matterin extent of item (rule 5C2), 44, 97in written space, 45

incipitdefinition, 146in note area, 50–51, 57as source of information, 3

incorrect information. See Erroneous informa-tion

indenture, notes on, 54interpolations

language of, 7punctuation of, 5

item-level cataloging, xi

Llanguage of description (rule 0E), 7language of item, notes on (rule 7B2), 54, 99Latin texts

title added entries, spelling in, 78transcription of i/j, 9transcription of u/v, 10

laws, collections of. See Standard workslayout, page, notes on (rule 7B8), 63, 102leaf

definition, 146in extent of multiple items, 43in extent of single items, 42in format notes, 53

leaf signaturedefinition, 146notes on (rule 7B7.3), 62–63

legal documentschief source of information, 2dimensions, 46extent of item, 42, 43MARC cataloging record example, 116–117supplied titles for (rule 1B2.3), 26, 93

letters (alphabet), missing

155

Index

in description (rule 0F6), 12title added entries, 78

letters (alphabet), transcription of (rule 0F2), 8–11

letters (correspondence)chief source of information, 2dimensions, 46extent of item, 43supplied titles for (rule1B2.2), 25

levels of description. See also Detailed descrip-tion; Summary description

and added entries, 79generally (rule 0D), 5–6

ligatures, transcription of, 8line fillers

definition, 146transcription of, 11

linking entries, 83–84literary manuscripts

cataloging of, xi–xiiMARC cataloging record examples, 111–116place and date of production area, 35–39transcription of title proper (rule 1B1.1), 18–

19, 90–91liturgical and devotional works. See also Standard

worksbibliography, 129–130title lacking, 22uniform title added entry, 80–81

location of originals/reproductions, notes on(rule 7B26), 72, 107

Mmacrons. see Suspension marks, transcription ofmanuscript, definition, 146–147manuscript as physical entity, added entry for

uniform title, 79–80manuscript as work, added entry for uniform

titles, 80manuscript corrections

title added entries, 78transcription of (rule 0F7), 12

maps in physical details, 44MARC cataloging record examples, 111–117MARC coding examples, 89–109MARC coding summary, 87–89material of item. See Support of itemmaterial specific details area

concordance between rule sets, 121not used (rule 3), 33

membranes in extent of itemmultiple volumes, 43single items, 42

minim, definition, 147[Miscellany] as supplied title, 23missing letters. See Letters (alphabet), missingmisspellings. See also Erroneous information

title added entries for, 78transcription of (rule 0F5), 11–12

multiple works, contents notes, 59–60musical notation, notes on (rule 7B11), 66, 104

Nnames associated with production and owner-

ship (7B14-7B15)added entry for, 82, 106notes on, 67–68

nature and scope notes (rule 7B1.2), 53, 99nomenclature, bibliography for, 131–132nomina sacra, transcription of, 12note area (rule 7), 49–73, 98–107

concordance between rule sets, 122–123levels of description in, 6punctuation of description, 50required notes (rule 7A4), 51–52sources of information, 3, 35, 50transcription of text in, 8

numeration, notes on, 61

Oomission mark of

in illegible text, 12items lacking a collective title, 19–20

omissions


156

punctuation of, 5from title or statement of responsibility (rule

1A2.2), 16, 89–90opisthograph


origin of item, notes on (rule 7B14), 67–68,104–105

other title information (rule 1E1), 27–28, 93–94ownership of item

added entries for, 82notes on, 68

Ppagination

definition, 147not in extent of item, 42notes on, 61

paleography, bibliography of, 126–128palimpsest


parallel titles, transcription of (rule 1D), 27parchment as support of item

definition, 147in physical details, 43

parentheses replacing square brackets, 5parts of larger item, extent of, 43pastedowns, notes on, 61patron of manuscript, notes on, 67period (full stop), omission of, 5permissions, notes on, 72physical arrangement, notes on (rule 7B7.1), 61,

102physical description area (rule 5)

concordance between rule sets, 121–122description, 41–46, 96–98

physical details area (rule 5C), 43–44, 97place and date of production area (rule 4)

concordance between rule sets, 121description, 35–39

place of production area

added entries (rule A3.1.1), 79, 108in description (rule 4C), 36–37, 95notes (rule 7B14), 67–68

popular names for manuscripts. See Bynames formanuscript

preliminary matter in contents notes, 57prescribed sources of information (rule 0B2), 4protocol

definition, 147as source of information, 2

provenance of item, notes on (rule 7B15), 68,105

publication, distribution, etc. area. See Place anddate of production area

published descriptions of manuscript, notes on(rule 7B20), 70, 106

published editions of manuscriptnotes on (rule 7B21), 70–71, 106as source of information, 3

punctuation of descriptionedition/version area (rule 2A2), 31generally (rule 0C), 4–5note area (rule 7A1), 50physical description area (rule 5A), 41place and date of production area (rule 4A2),

35title and statement of responsibility area (rule

1A1), 15

Qquestion mark, use of

dates, 38–39place of production, 37

quire signaturedefinition, 147notes on (rule 7B7.3), 62–63

quiresdefinition, 147notes on (rule 7B7.2), 62

quotation marks around transcribed text innotes, 50

157

Index

Rrecipient of manuscript, notes on, 67reproductions

location of (rule 7B26), 72, 107notes on (rule 7B22-7B23), 71, 106–107physical description of, 41in restrictions on access, 72

restrictions on access, notes on (rule 7B24), 72,107

rollsdefinition, 147dimensions (rule 5D4), 46, 98extent of item, 42in format notes, 54multiple volumes, 43

rubricsdefinition, 148in note area, 50–51, 57as source of information, 2, 3

rulingsdefinition, 148description of, 44–45in notes (rule 7B8), 63, 102

running title as source of information, 2

Ssacred scripture. See also Standard works

bibliography, 129–130title lacking, 22uniform title added entry, 80–81

sales catalogs. See Catalogs, publishedscope of rules

edition/version area (rule 2A1), 31generally (rule 0A), 1–2place and date of production area (rule 4A1),

35scribes, notes on, 64script

definition, 148of description (rule 0E), 7in notes (rule 7B9), 64, 102–103

script, grade of

definition, 145in notes (rule 7B9), 64, 102–103

sealsdefinition, 148description of, 46notes on, 67

secundo folioadded entries (rule A.3.2.1), 81–82, 109definition, 148notes on (rule 7B6), 60, 102

semi-diplomatic transcription. See Diplomatictranscription

series areaconcordance between rule sets, 122not used (rule 6), 47

sheets in extent of itemmultiple items, 43single items (rule 5D3), 46, 98

shelfmarksadded entry, 80–81definition, 148

shelfmarks, notes oncurrent (rule 7B19), 69–70, 106former and related marks (rule 7B17), 69, 105

shorthand notations. See Tironian notae, tran-scription of

[sic] in transcriptions, 11sign manual, definition, 148signature, leaf. See Leaf signaturesignature, quire. See Quire signaturesources of information

edition/version area (rule 2A3), 31generally (rule 0B), 2–4items lacking a collective title, 20note area (rule 7A2), 50physical description area (rule 5A2), 41place and date of production area (rule 4A3),

35title and statement of responsibility area

(rules 1A2, 7B3), 16–18, 55spellings. See Misspellings; Variant spellingsspine title as source of information, 3


158

square brackets ([ ])and abbreviations, 12and interpolations, 5in misspelled words, 11in place and date of production area, 35and source of information, 3, 4

standard number and terms of availability area,not used (rule 8), 75

standard works. See also Liturgical and devo-tional works; Sacred scripture

analysis of, 83contents notes (rule 7B5.3), 58–59, 100–101

statement of responsibilityadded later (rule 1F2), 28–29, 94items lacking a collective title, 20more than one (rule 1F4), 29, 94source note (rule 7B3), 55transcription of (rule 1F1), 28–29, 94

statement of responsibility relating to edition(rule 2C), 32

stroke marks in transcription, 11summary description

added entries in, 79contents notes, 55–56generally, 6MARC cataloging record example, 111–112required notes (rule 7A4.1), 51–52

supplied titles, 21–24support of item

definition, 149in extent of item (rule 5C1), 43–44, 97notes on (rule 7B7.1), 61, 102

suspension marks, transcription of, 12syllable separation in transcription (rule 0F5),

11symbols, cataloger’s description of, 7

TTironian notae, transcription of, 12title added entries, justifications for, 78title added subsequent to creation of text (rule

1B1.2), 19, 91

title and statement of responsibility area (rule 1)concordance between rule sets, 120language of description, 7omissions (rule 1A2.2), 16–17, 89–95transcription of, 8

title lacking. See also Supplied titlesliterary manuscripts (rule 1B1.6), 21–24, 91–

93title page

definition, 149as source of information, 2, 3

title properadded entry for, 78explanations of (rule 1E2), 28, 94letters, legal documents, and archival records

(rule 1B2), 24–26literary manuscripts (rule 1B1), 18–24, 90–91source note (rule 7B3), 55, 99–100

titles, multiple, transcription of, 17titles of honor in statement of responsibility

(rule 1F5), 29, 94–95transcription, diplomatic. See Diplomatic

transcriptiontranscription and editorial practice

of contents for note, 57generally (rule 0F), 7–13in note area (rule 7A3), 50–51notes on, 71place and date of production area, 36punctuation of, 5

translators in contents notes, 57transposition of statement or responsibility, 28–

29

Uu/v, transcription of, 10–11unbound collections, extent of item, 43uncertain dates (rule 4D2), 38–39, 95–96uncertain place of production (rule 4C2), 37, 95uniform titles

added entry for manuscript as physical entity(rule A3.1.2), 79–81, 108–109

159

Index

bynames as, 69in contents notes, 59and retrieval, 8same as supplied title, 22

union catalog of manuscripts, xiiiuse and reproduction permissions, notes on

(rule 7B25), 72, 107

Vvariant spellings

title added entries for, 78transcription of (rule 0F5), 11–12

variant titlesnotes on (rule 7B4), 55, 100

selection of predominant title, 17–18vellum, terminology for, 43, 149vernacular texts

title added entries, spelling in, 78transcription of i/j, 10transcription of u/v, 11

verse and dimensions of written space (rule5D2), 45, 98

Wwatermarks, notes on, 61word division in transcription (rule 0F4), 11written space, description of, 44–45